WO2023157740A1 - Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device - Google Patents

Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023157740A1
WO2023157740A1 PCT/JP2023/004269 JP2023004269W WO2023157740A1 WO 2023157740 A1 WO2023157740 A1 WO 2023157740A1 JP 2023004269 W JP2023004269 W JP 2023004269W WO 2023157740 A1 WO2023157740 A1 WO 2023157740A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
formula
compounds
compound
substituent
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2023/004269
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
信哉 西
拓也 鶴田
祐一 安原
大貴 瀧下
怜子 辰馬
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2023157740A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023157740A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B55/00Azomethine dyes
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B67/00Influencing the physical, e.g. the dyeing or printing properties of dyestuffs without chemical reactions, e.g. by treating with solvents grinding or grinding assistants, coating of pigments or dyes; Process features in the making of dyestuff preparations; Dyestuff preparations of a special physical nature, e.g. tablets, films
    • C09B67/006Preparation of organic pigments
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to coloring compositions.
  • the present invention also relates to a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition.
  • a color filter usually comprises three primary color pixels of red, green and blue and serves to separate the transmitted light into the three primary colors.
  • Patent Document 1 describes forming colored pixels of a color filter using a coloring composition using a specific quinophthalone compound as a coloring agent.
  • optical filters such as color filters have pixels of multiple colors.
  • Such an optical filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming pixels of each color.
  • color mixture may occur due to thermal diffusion of the coloring agent between adjacent pixels of other colors. From the viewpoint of the color separation performance of each color pixel, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of such thermal diffusion of the colorant.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a film in which thermal diffusion of a coloring agent is suppressed.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition.
  • a coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent comprises a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom;
  • R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring
  • R 3 to R 7 two adjacent groups may be combined to form a ring
  • R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH
  • R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may
  • B 1 in the above formula (2) represents a group represented by formula (B-1) or formula (B-2),
  • R B11 to R B14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B11 to R B14 may combine to form a ring.
  • R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X1
  • R B21 to R B26 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 may combine to form a ring.
  • R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X1
  • R C11 to R C14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 may combine to form a ring.
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2
  • R C21 to R C24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 may combine to form a ring.
  • X C21 O
  • NHR XC1 or S
  • R XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X2 .
  • ⁇ 5> The coloring composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 4>, wherein the coloring agent contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a green coloring agent and a red coloring agent.
  • ⁇ 6> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 5>, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • ⁇ 7> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 6>, which is used for color filters.
  • ⁇ 8> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>.
  • An optical filter comprising the film according to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 10> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to ⁇ 8>.
  • ⁇ 11> An image display device comprising the film according to ⁇ 8>.
  • a coloring composition capable of forming a film in which thermal diffusion of a coloring agent is suppressed. Also, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition can be provided.
  • is used to include the numerical values before and after it as lower and upper limits.
  • a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent.
  • an "alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • exposure includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified.
  • Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
  • EUV light extreme ultraviolet rays
  • (meth)acrylate” represents both or either acrylate and methacrylate
  • (meth)acryl represents both or either acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth) ) acryloyl refers to acryloyl and/or methacryloyl.
  • Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group
  • Et represents an ethyl group
  • Bu represents a butyl group
  • Ph represents a phenyl group.
  • the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • total solid content refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
  • a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
  • the term "process” includes not only an independent process, but also when the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is A coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent,
  • the coloring agent is characterized by containing a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can form a film in which thermal diffusion of the coloring agent is suppressed.
  • Compound A described above forms a metal complex by coordinating the compound represented by the formula (1) to the metal atom, so it is presumed that the mobility in the film is small.
  • compound A interacts with the coloring agent other than compound A to form a colorant in the film. It is speculated that the motility of other colorants can be reduced. Therefore, it is presumed that by using the coloring composition of the present invention, it was possible to form a film in which the thermal diffusion of the coloring agent was suppressed.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters or infrared transmission filters. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels or as a coloring composition for forming infrared transmission filters, and is more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels.
  • Pixel types include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, and the like. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred, and red pixels and green pixels are preferable. More preferably, it is a green pixel.
  • the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film is 50% is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm. More preferably in the wavelength range of 520 nm, even more preferably in the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm.
  • a coloring composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent.
  • Colorants include yellow colorants, orange colorants, red colorants, green colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, black colorants, and the like.
  • the coloring agent may be a pigment or a dye.
  • the pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, but an organic pigment is preferred from the viewpoints of color variation, ease of dispersibility, safety, and the like.
  • a pigment derivative can also be used as the colorant.
  • the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment and a pigment derivative.
  • Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton.
  • the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less.
  • the average primary particle size of the pigment can be determined from the photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment.
  • the average primary particle size in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
  • the crystallite size of the organic pigment and pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 50 nm, more preferably 0.5 to 30 nm, and even more preferably 1 to 15 nm.
  • the crystallite size can be obtained from the half width of the diffraction angle peak using an X-ray diffractometer, and is calculated using Scherrer's formula.
  • the crystallite size of organic pigments and pigment derivatives can be adjusted by known methods such as adjustment of production conditions and pulverization after production.
  • Compound A As the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention, one containing a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom is used.
  • R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring
  • R 3 to R 7 two adjacent groups may be combined to form a ring
  • R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH
  • R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • R 1 to R 7 of formula (1) include a substituent T described later, a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, and a group represented by formula (R-2) described later. are mentioned.
  • Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) and the group represented by formula (R-2) are halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, and cyano groups.
  • R 1 and R 2 in formula (1) are preferably combined to form a ring, and form an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, a heterocyclic ring, a cyclic ketone, a cyclic thioketone or a cyclic imine. More preferably, it forms a group represented by formula (B-1) or formula (B-2), to improve the stability over time of the colored composition, the viscosity over time Forming a group represented by the formula (B-1) is particularly preferable because it can suppress an increase in the amount of the group represented by the formula (B-1).
  • R B11 to R B14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B11 to R B14 may combine to form a ring.
  • R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X1
  • R B21 to R B26 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 may combine to form a ring.
  • R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X1 .
  • the substituents represented by R B11 to R B14 in formula (B-1) and the substituents represented by R B21 to R B26 in formula (B-2) include a substituent T described later and a substituent represented by formula (R-1) described later.
  • the group represented by is mentioned.
  • Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, hetero aryloxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonylamino group, arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group,
  • a halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a fluorine atom, and more preferably a chlorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred because it can improve the stability of the coloring composition over time and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. is preferred, and linear is more preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
  • the alkoxy group may be either linear or branched, but is more preferably linear because it can improve the stability over time of the colored composition and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. .
  • R B11 to R B14 in formula (B-1) and R B21 to R B26 in formula (B-2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or represented by formula (R-1) described later. is preferably a group that is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and still more preferably a halogen atom.
  • R-1 halogen atom
  • at least one of R B11 to R B14 and at least one of R B21 to R B26 may be a group represented by formula (R-1). preferable.
  • Adjacent two groups among R B11 to R B14 of formula (B-1) may be bonded to form a ring, which improves the stability over time of the colored composition and reduces the viscosity over time. It is preferable not to form a ring because the increase can be further suppressed.
  • Two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 of formula (B-2) may be bonded to form a ring. is preferably not formed.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later, and a group represented by the formula (R-1) described later, and a halogen atom or a group represented by the formula (R-1) described later. preferable.
  • X B11 in formula (B-1) represents ⁇ O, ⁇ NHR XB1 or ⁇ S, and is preferably ⁇ O.
  • R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R XB1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
  • X B21 in formula (B-2) represents ⁇ O, ⁇ NHR XB2 or ⁇ S, and is preferably ⁇ O.
  • R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R XB2 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
  • Two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) may combine to form a ring.
  • the formed ring may further have a substituent.
  • substituents include a substituent T described later, a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, and a group represented by formula (R-2) described later.
  • R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom or a group represented by formula (R-2).
  • R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) are as follows. - An embodiment in which R 3 to R 7 are hydrogen atoms. - An embodiment in which at least one of R 3 to R 7 is an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms) and the rest are hydrogen atoms. - An embodiment in which at least one of R 3 to R 7 is a group represented by formula (R-1) described later and the rest are hydrogen atoms. An embodiment in which one of R 3 to R 7 is a group represented by formula (R-2) described later and the rest are hydrogen atoms. - An embodiment in which one of R 3 to R 7 is a hydroxy group and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
  • R8- R8 in formula (1) represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group.
  • the hydrocarbon group represented by R 8 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group, preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, still more preferably 1-3, and particularly preferably 1.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-12, even more preferably 6.
  • R 8 in formula (1) is preferably a hydrogen atom because the planarity of the compound is increased, the mobility in the film is reduced, and the occurrence of thermal diffusion can be further suppressed.
  • R 8 in formula (1) may combine with R 7 to form a ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later and a group represented by formula (R-1) described later.
  • X 1 and X 2 - X 1 and X 2 in Formula (1) each independently represent —OH, —NHR X1 or —SH, and R 1 X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • R 1 X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents represented by R X1 include an alkyl group and an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-15, even more preferably 1-8.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-12.
  • the alkyl group and aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
  • X 1 and X 2 in formula (1) are each independently —OH.
  • L1- L 1 in formula (1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, a group represented by formula (C-1) and a group represented by formula (C-2). It is preferably a group represented by (C-1) or a group represented by formula (C-2), which improves the stability over time of the colored composition and can further suppress the increase in viscosity over time. For this reason, a group represented by formula (C-1) is more preferable.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Moreover, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-10, and particularly preferably 1-5.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1-3. A heteroatom constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3-30, more preferably 3-18, and more preferably 3-12.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified for the substituent T described later and the groups represented by the formula (R-1).
  • R C11 to R C14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 may combine to form a ring.
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X2 ;
  • R C21 to R C24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 may combine to form a ring.
  • R XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • *1 and *2 each represent a bond
  • *1 is a bond with X2 .
  • the substituents represented by R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) and the substituents represented by R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) include the substituent T described later and the formula (R-1) described later.
  • the group represented by is mentioned.
  • Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, hetero aryloxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonylamino group, arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group
  • a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a nitro group or a cyano group is more preferred, and a halogen atom, a nitro group or a cyano group is particularly preferred.
  • a halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a fluorine atom, and more preferably a chlorine atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred because it can improve the stability of the coloring composition over time and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. is preferred, and linear is more preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3.
  • the alkoxy group may be either linear or branched, but is more preferably linear because it can improve the stability over time of the colored composition and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. .
  • R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) and R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, or in formula (R-1) is preferably a group represented, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R C11 to R C14 and at least one of R C21 to R C24 may be a group represented by formula (R-1). preferable.
  • Two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) may combine to form a ring.
  • Two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) may combine to form a ring.
  • the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring.
  • the formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later and a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group or a cyano group.
  • X C21 in Formula (C-2) represents ⁇ O, ⁇ NHR XC1 or ⁇ S
  • R 1 XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R XC1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
  • Halogen atom e.g., fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom
  • alkyl group preferably alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkenyl group preferably alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkynyl group preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an aryl group preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • a heteroaryl group preferably a heteroaryl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • an amino group preferably amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms
  • alkoxy group preferably alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms
  • aryloxy group preferably aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms
  • heteroaryloxy group preferably carbon 1 to 30 heteroaryloxy groups
  • acyl groups preferably acyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms
  • L R1 represents a single bond or an n+1 valent linking group
  • Y R1 represents an acid group or a basic group
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • n is 1 when L R1 is a single bond.
  • L R1 in formula (R-1) represents a single bond or an n+1-valent linking group.
  • L R1 is preferably an n+1 valent linking group.
  • the n+1-valent linking group represented by L R1 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, -NR L10 -, -N ⁇ , -NR L10 CO-, -CONR L10 -, -NR L10 SO 2 -, -SO 2 NR L10 - and groups consisting of combinations thereof.
  • RL10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Moreover, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-10, and particularly preferably 1-5.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-12, even more preferably 6.
  • the heterocyclic group is preferably a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1-3.
  • a heteroatom constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom.
  • the number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3-30, more preferably 3-18, and more preferably 3-12.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Substituents include alkyl groups and aryl groups.
  • the n+1-valent linking group represented by L R1 is a group obtained by combining —O— and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a group obtained by combining —NR L10 — and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, or —N ⁇ and an aliphatic It is preferably a group in combination with a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a group in which —O— is combined with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a group in which —NR L10 — is combined with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. , —O— and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group are more preferred.
  • Y R1 in formula (R-1) represents an acid group or a basic group.
  • Acid groups represented by Y R1 include -COOH, -SO 3 H, and -L Y1 -NH-L Y2 -R Y1 .
  • L Y1 and L Y2 each independently represent —CO— or —SO 2 —, and R Y1 represents a substituent.
  • At least one of L Y1 and L Y2 is preferably —SO 2 —, and more preferably L Y2 is —SO 2 —.
  • the substituent represented by RY1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group. Alkyl groups and aryl groups may have substituents.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • Basic groups represented by Y R1 include —NR Y2 R Y3 .
  • R Y2 and R Y3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 to 3, particularly preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-12.
  • R Y2 and R Y3 may combine to form a ring. Furthermore, it may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, and aryl groups.
  • n in formula (R-1) represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 1.
  • R 1a to R 7a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1a and R 2a may combine to form a ring
  • R 3a to R 7a two adjacent groups of may be combined to form a ring
  • R 8a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 8a and R 7a may combine to form a ring
  • X 1a and X 2a each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH
  • R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, when X 1a and X 2a are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1a and X 2a may be bonded
  • L 1a represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • one of R 3a to R 7a is a bond with formula (1) or includes a bond with formula (1).
  • R 1a to R 8a , X 1a , X 2a and L 1a in formula (1a) are the same as R 1 to R 8 , X 1 , X 2 and L 1 in formula (1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. be.
  • the compound represented by formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by formula (2).
  • R 3 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 may combine to form a ring
  • R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring
  • X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH
  • R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded
  • B 1 and C 1 each independently represent a cyclic structure.
  • R 3 to R 8 , X 1 and X 2 in formula (2) have the same definitions as R 3 to R 8 , X 1 and X 2 in formula (1).
  • Cyclic structures represented by B 1 in formula (2) include aliphatic hydrocarbon rings, aromatic hydrocarbon rings, heterocycles, cyclic ketones, cyclic thioketones and cyclic imines, and may be represented by formula (B-1) or formula ( It is preferably a group represented by B-2), more preferably a group represented by formula (B-1).
  • the cyclic structure represented by C 1 of formula (2) includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, a heterocyclic ring, a group represented by formula (C-1) and a group represented by formula (C-2), A group represented by formula (C-1) or a group represented by formula (C-2) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (C-1) is more preferable.
  • the metal atoms coordinated by the compound represented by formula (1) include Cu, Zn, Ni, Al, Pd, Co, Mn and Fe, and Cu, Zn, Ni, Al or Pd is preferred, Cu, Zn, Ni or Pd is more preferred, Cu, Zn or Ni is even more preferred, and Cu or Zn is particularly preferred.
  • one compound represented by formula (1) may be coordinated to these metal atoms, or two or more compounds may be coordinated. Further, the metal atom may be further coordinated with a ligand (another ligand) other than the compound represented by formula (1).
  • Ligands include halogen atoms (chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom, etc.), heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds (e.g., triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''- pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (eg, N,N-dimethyl
  • Examples of compound A include compounds represented by the following formula (1-1).
  • M 1 represents a metal atom that may be coordinated with a ligand
  • R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring
  • R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group
  • R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring
  • X 11 and X 12 each independently represent -O- , -N - R X1 or S-
  • R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Examples of the metal atom represented by M 1 in formula (1-1) include the metal atoms described above.
  • the ligands that may be coordinated to the metal atom include the ligands described above.
  • compound A examples include compounds of structural examples (A-1) to (A-73) described in the examples below.
  • the compound A may be a pigment or a dye.
  • Compound A may also be a pigment derivative.
  • the compound represented by formula (1) is preferably a compound having a group represented by formula (R-1) as a substituent.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of compound A is preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 600 nm.
  • the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent other than the compound A (hereinafter also referred to as another coloring agent).
  • a coloring agent other than the compound A hereinafter also referred to as another coloring agent.
  • Other colorants used in combination include green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, orange colorants, and the like. Pigment derivatives can also be used as other colorants.
  • the other coloring agent is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent, a yellow coloring agent and an orange coloring agent, and a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent. It is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of, and more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of green colorants and red colorants.
  • red colorants examples include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, thioindigo compounds, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo It is preferably a compound, more preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound. Also, the red colorant is preferably a pigment.
  • red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81: 3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297 and other red pigments.
  • a red colorant a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Japanese Patent No.
  • 10-2019-0140741 anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140744, JP 2020 A perylene compound described in JP-A-079396, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0025 to 0041 of JP-A-2020-066702, and the like can also be used.
  • a red colorant a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 254, 255, 264, 269 and 272 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, 272 are more preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 272 are more preferred.
  • green colorants examples include phthalocyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, etc., preferably phthalocyanine compounds, and more preferably phthalocyanine pigments. Also, the green colorant is preferably a pigment.
  • green colorants include C.I. I. Green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65 and 66 are included. Further, as a green colorant, a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. In addition, as a green colorant, the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No.
  • 106909027 the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand described in WO 2012/102395, described in JP 2019-008014.
  • the core-shell type dyes described in can also be used.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62 and 63 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Greens 36 and 58 are more preferred. Used.
  • orange colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. of orange pigments.
  • Yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds and perylene compounds. Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167,
  • a nickel azobarbiturate complex having the following structure can also be used.
  • Quinophthalone compounds quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074986, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074985, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-050420, JP-A-2008-031281
  • the quinophthalone compound described, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-B-48-032765, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2019-008014, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-6607427, and JP-A-2019-073695 The quinophthalone compound described, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-B-48-032765, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2019-008014, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-6607427, and JP-A-2019-073695.
  • the methine dye described the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073696, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073697, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073698, Korean Patent No. 10- Compounds described in 2014-0034963, compounds described in JP 2017-095706, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201920495, compounds described in Patent No.
  • JP 2020-033525 Compounds described in JP-A-2020-033524, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033523, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033522, JP-A-2020-033521 Compounds described in, compounds described in WO 2020/045200, compounds described in WO 2020/045199, compounds described in WO 2020/045197, described in JP 2020-093994
  • X 1 to X 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP1) include compounds described in paragraph number 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711 .
  • Y 1 to Y 3 each independently represent a halogen atom.
  • n and m are integers from 0 to 6; p is an integer from 0 to 5; (n+m) is 1 or more.
  • Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP2) include compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
  • purple colorants include C.I. I. Purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 are included.
  • blue colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc. pigments.
  • An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A-2011-157478.
  • diarylmethane compound described in JP-A-2020-504758 can also be used as a green colorant or blue colorant.
  • the pyrrolopyrrole pigment has a crystallite size of 140 ⁇ or less in the plane direction corresponding to the maximum peak in the X-ray diffraction pattern among the eight planes ( ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1) of the crystal lattice planes. is also preferred. Further, the physical properties of the pyrrolopyrrole pigment are preferably set as described in paragraphs 0028 to 0073 of JP-A-2020-097744.
  • the pigment it is also preferable to use a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having a Raman spectrum described in Japanese Patent No. 6744002 from the viewpoint of enhancing spectral characteristics.
  • a dioxazine pigment with a controlled contact angle described in WO 2019/107166 from the viewpoint of viscosity adjustment.
  • Dyes can also be used as other coloring agents.
  • the dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used.
  • Pigment multimers can also be used for other coloring agents.
  • the dye multimer is preferably a dye dissolved in a solvent and used. Further, the dye multimer may form particles. When the dye multimer is particles, it is usually used in a state of being dispersed in a solvent.
  • the particulate dye multimer can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and specific examples include the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682.
  • a dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less.
  • a plurality of dye structures in one molecule may be the same dye structure or different dye structures.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less.
  • Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, WO 2016/031442, etc. Compounds can also be used.
  • colorants include triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, xanthene compounds described in JP-A-2020-117638, and those described in WO2020/174991.
  • phthalocyanine compounds, isoindoline compounds or salts thereof described in JP-A-2020-160279 compounds represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069442, Korean Patent Publication No. 10- Compound represented by Formula 1 described in 2020-0069730, Compound represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069070, Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069067 Compound represented by Formula 1 described, compound represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No.
  • An isoindoline compound described in JP-A-2004-203155 can be used.
  • the other colorant may be a rotaxane, and the dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, may be used in the rod-like structure, or may be used in both structures.
  • Pigment derivatives can also be used for other colorants.
  • Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton.
  • Dye skeletons constituting pigment derivatives include a quinoline dye skeleton, a benzimidazolone dye skeleton, a benzoisoindole dye skeleton, a benzothiazole dye skeleton, an iminium dye skeleton, a squarylium dye skeleton, a croconium dye skeleton, an oxonol dye skeleton, and a pyrrolopyrrole dye.
  • diketopyrrolopyrrole dye skeleton azo dye skeleton, azomethine dye skeleton, phthalocyanine dye skeleton, naphthalocyanine dye skeleton, anthraquinone dye skeleton, quinacridone dye skeleton, dioxazine dye skeleton, perinone dye skeleton, perylene dye skeleton, thioindigo dye skeleton, Isoindoline dye skeletons, isoindolinone dye skeletons, quinophthalone dye skeletons, dithiol dye skeletons, triarylmethane dye skeletons, pyrromethene dye skeletons, and the like can be mentioned.
  • the acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, a carboxylic acid amide group, a sulfonic acid amide group, an imidic acid group and salts thereof.
  • Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, phosphonium ion and the like.
  • the carboxylic acid amide group a group represented by —NHCOR X1 is preferable.
  • sulfonic acid amide group a group represented by —NHSO 2 R X2 is preferable.
  • the imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 , —CONHSO 2 R X4 , —CONHCOR X5 or —SO 2 NHCOR X6 , more preferably —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 .
  • R X1 to R X6 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the alkyl groups and aryl groups represented by R X1 to R X6 may have substituents.
  • the substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
  • Basic groups include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and salts thereof, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups.
  • Atoms or atomic groups constituting salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
  • the pigment derivative include the compounds described in Examples below, the compounds described in JP-A-56-118462, the compounds described in JP-A-63-264674, and JP-A-01-217077.
  • Compounds described in, compounds described in JP-A-03-009961, compounds described in JP-A-03-026767, compounds described in JP-A-03-153780, described in JP-A-03-045662 The compound, the compound described in JP-A-04-285669, the compound described in JP-A-06-145546, the compound described in JP-A-06-212088, the compound described in JP-A-06-240158 , the compound described in JP-A-10-030063, the compound described in JP-A-10-195326, the compound described in paragraph numbers 0086 to 0098 of WO 2011/024896, WO 2012/102399
  • the content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 55% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and even more preferably 70% by mass or less.
  • the content of the pigment in the colorant is preferably 20-100% by mass, more preferably 50-100% by mass, and even more preferably 70-100% by mass. Further, the total content of the pigment and the pigment derivative in the colorant is preferably 25 to 100% by mass, more preferably 55 to 100% by mass, and further preferably 75 to 100% by mass. preferable.
  • the content of compound A in the colorant is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and even more preferably 15% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit can be 100% by mass, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass or less.
  • the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention contains compound A and a green coloring agent
  • the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 60 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the green coloring agent.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the red coloring agent is 5 to 5 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red coloring agent. It is preferably 50 parts by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, more preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a coloring agent containing a yellow coloring agent and a green coloring agent.
  • compound A is preferably a yellow colorant.
  • the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the green colorant.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a coloring agent containing a yellow coloring agent and a red coloring agent.
  • compound A is preferably a yellow colorant.
  • the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, more preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
  • the content of the yellow coloring agent in the coloring agent is preferably 30% by mass or more, and is 40% by mass or more. is more preferable, and 50% by mass or more is even more preferable.
  • compound A is preferably a yellow colorant.
  • the content of compound A in the yellow colorant is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and even more preferably 30% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit can be 100% by mass, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin.
  • the resin is blended, for example, for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or as a binder.
  • a resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also called a dispersant.
  • such uses of the resin are only examples, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000.
  • the upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less.
  • the lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
  • resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, vinyl acetate resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resins, polyurea resins, and the like.
  • norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance.
  • Commercially available norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520). Further, as the resin, the resin described in the examples of International Publication No.
  • a resin having a fluorene skeleton can also be preferably used.
  • the description of US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0102610 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
  • the resin the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A-2020-186373, the alkali-soluble resin described in JP-A-2020-186325, and the Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339.
  • a resin represented by the formula 1 can also be used.
  • a resin having an acid group As the resin.
  • acid groups include carboxy groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfo groups, and phenolic hydroxy groups. Only one kind of these acid groups may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used.
  • a resin having an acid group can be used, for example, as an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30-500 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 150 mgKOH/g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH/g or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group.
  • the resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain. It is more preferably a polymer, and more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group on its side chain and a repeating unit containing no basic group. Resins having basic groups can also be used as dispersants.
  • the amine value of the resin having basic groups is preferably 5-300 mgKOH/g.
  • the lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less.
  • Examples of the basic group contained in the resin having a basic group include groups represented by the following formula (a-1) and groups represented by the following formula (a-2).
  • R a1 and R a2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R a1 and R a2 may combine to form a ring;
  • R a11 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group or an oxy radical
  • R a12 to R a19 each independently , represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl groups represented by R a1 , R a2 and R a11 to R a19 is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-15, still more preferably 1-8, and particularly preferably 1-5.
  • the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear.
  • the alkyl group may have a substituent.
  • the aryl group represented by R a1 , R a2 and R a11 to R a19 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryl group may have a substituent.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group represented by R a11 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 15, even more preferably 1 to 8, and particularly preferably 1 to 5.
  • the alkoxy group may have a substituent.
  • the aryloxy group represented by R a11 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the aryloxy group may have a substituent.
  • the acyl group represented by R a11 preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
  • the acyl group may have a substituent.
  • resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie Japan), SOLSPERSE11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 375 00, 38500, 39000, 53095 , 56000, 7100 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (manufactured by BASF).
  • the resin having a basic group is a block copolymer (B) described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0112 of JP-A-2014-219665, and described in paragraph numbers 0046-0076 of JP-A-2018-156021.
  • block copolymers A1 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved.
  • a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used in combination, the content of the resin having a basic group is 20 to 500 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group. It is preferably from 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably from 50 to 200 parts by mass.
  • a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as an "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include
  • R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
  • paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
  • the resin preferably contains a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group
  • n represents an integer of 0-15.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, particularly 2 or 3.
  • n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
  • Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol.
  • Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • resin Ac a resin having an aromatic carboxy group
  • the aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit.
  • the aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit.
  • an aromatic carboxy group is a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring.
  • the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1-4, more preferably 1-2.
  • Resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ac-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2).
  • Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group
  • L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-
  • L 2 represents a divalent linking group
  • Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group
  • L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-
  • L 12 represents a trivalent linking group
  • P 10 represents a polymer represents a chain.
  • aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) examples include structures derived from aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides, structures derived from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides, and the like.
  • Aromatic tricarboxylic anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
  • the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 1 may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group.
  • Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). and the like.
  • n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 2.
  • n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and still more preferably 2.
  • n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, preferably 1 More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
  • Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L1 .
  • L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and these A group obtained by combining two or more of The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
  • the arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-.
  • L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a combination of an alkylene group and an arylene group; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group; Examples include groups in which at least one selected from —NH— and —S— are combined, and alkylene groups are preferred.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
  • L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and 2 of these Groups in which more than one species are combined are included.
  • Hydrocarbon groups include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-10.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
  • L 12b represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac-2) with P10 is shown.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, and a hydrocarbon group or a group of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and —O— is preferred.
  • L 12c represents a trivalent linking group
  • X 1 represents S
  • *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2)
  • *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac-2) with P10 is shown.
  • the trivalent linking group represented by L 12c includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, preferably a hydrocarbon group.
  • P 10 in formula (Ac-2) represents a polymer chain.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P10 is preferably 500-20,000.
  • the lower limit is preferably 1000 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P10 is within the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition is good.
  • the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
  • the polymer chain represented by P10 may contain an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group or a cyclic ether group.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant.
  • Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins).
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups.
  • the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) a resin having an acid group content of 70 mol % or more is preferable when the total amount of the acid group and the basic group is 100 mol %.
  • the acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group.
  • the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10-105 mgKOH/g.
  • a basic dispersant represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups.
  • a resin containing more than 50 mol % of basic groups is preferable when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %.
  • the basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin.
  • graft resin for details of the graft resin, reference can be made to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (resin Ac).
  • resin Ac resin having an aromatic carboxy group
  • examples of the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group include those mentioned above.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of its main chain and side chains.
  • the polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom.
  • a resin having The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity.
  • paragraph numbers 0022 to 0097 of JP-A-2009-203462 and paragraph numbers 0102-0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. .
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core.
  • resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
  • the resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain.
  • the content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70, of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol %.
  • resins described in JP-A-2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077, Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066687 , a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, a dispersant described in WO 2016/104803, and the like can also be used.
  • Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK-Chemie Japan, SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Japan, Efka series manufactured by BASF, and Ajinomoto Fine Techno ( Co., Ltd. Ajisper series and the like.
  • the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP-A-2012-137564 and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP-A-2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
  • the content of the resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 60% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 15% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less.
  • the content of the acid group-containing resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 60% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 15% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less.
  • the content of the dispersant is preferably 10 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment.
  • the lower limit is preferably 15 parts by mass or more, more preferably 20 parts by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 60 parts by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one resin, or may contain two or more resins. When two or more resins are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention contains a solvent.
  • An organic solvent is mentioned as a solvent.
  • the type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition.
  • Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For these details, reference can be made to paragraph number 0223 of WO2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used.
  • organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbylate tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-di
  • aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be better reduced for environmental reasons (e.g., 50 mass ppm (parts per million), 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less).
  • an organic solvent with a low metal content it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015). .
  • Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter.
  • the filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 3 ⁇ m or less.
  • the material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
  • the organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
  • the content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
  • the content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10-95% by mass, more preferably 20-90% by mass, and even more preferably 30-90% by mass.
  • the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances.
  • substantially free of environmentally regulated substances means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the colored composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less. , is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less.
  • Environmental control substances include, for example, benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene.
  • a method for reducing the amount of environmentally regulated substances there is a method in which the system is heated or decompressed to raise the temperature to the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substances or higher, and the environmentally regulated substances are distilled off from the system.
  • distilling off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to increase the efficiency.
  • a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from progressing during the vacuum distillation and the intermolecular cross-linking.
  • These distillation methods are the raw material stage, the reaction product of the raw materials (for example, the resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the colored composition stage produced by mixing these compounds. It is possible at any stage such as
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • a polymerizable compound known compounds that can be crosslinked by radicals, acids or heat can be used.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups.
  • the polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as monomer, prepolymer, oligomer, etc., but monomer is preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100-3000.
  • the upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less.
  • the lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, even more preferably 250 or more.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, an ethylenically unsaturated bond Compounds containing 3 to 6 containing groups are more preferred.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound.
  • polymerizable compound examples include paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705, paragraph 0227 of JP-A-2013-029760, paragraph numbers 0254-0257 of JP-A-2008-292970, and JP-A-2008-292970. 2013-253224, paragraphs 0034 to 0038, JP 2012-208494, paragraph 0477, JP 2017-048367, JP 6057891, the compound described in JP 6031807 , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-320 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and their (meth)acryloyl groups via ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residues
  • Compounds of conjugated structures (eg SR454,
  • diglycerin EO ethylene oxide modified (meth) acrylate
  • pentaerythritol tetraacrylate manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., NK Ester A -TMMT
  • 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA
  • RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Aronix TO-2349 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • NK Oligo UA-7200 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • DPHA-40H manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Polymerizable compounds include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane propyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, Trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate can also be used.
  • Commercial products of trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306 and M-305.
  • M-303, M-452, M-450 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • a compound having an acid group can also be used as the polymerizable compound.
  • the acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferred.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate.
  • Commercially available polymerizable compounds having an acid group include Aronix M-510, M-520 and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is preferably 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, more preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g.
  • the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH/g or more, the solubility in the developer is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH/g or less, it is advantageous in terms of production and handling.
  • a compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used as the polymerizable compound.
  • Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a caprolactone structure include KAYARAD DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • a polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group can also be used as the polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group is preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group, and 3 to 4 having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups.
  • a hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound is more preferred.
  • Commercially available polymerizable compounds having an alkyleneoxy group include, for example, SR-494, a tetrafunctional (meth)acrylate having four ethyleneoxy groups manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd., and an isobutyleneoxy group manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD TPA-330, which is a trifunctional (meth)acrylate having three.
  • a polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used as the polymerizable compound.
  • Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).
  • the polymerizable compound it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances such as toluene.
  • environmentally regulated substances such as toluene.
  • Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
  • the content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more, and even more preferably 3% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more polymerizable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds and the like.
  • halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.
  • acylphosphine compounds e.g., acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds and the like.
  • photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, hexaarylbi imidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketones compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds, more preferably oxime compounds.
  • hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1′-biimidazole, etc. is mentioned.
  • ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (above, BASF company) and the like.
  • Commercially available ⁇ -aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, and Irgacure 3.
  • acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF).
  • Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, International Publication No.
  • oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropane-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime) and the like.
  • An oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. mentioned.
  • an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used.
  • Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
  • An oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of.
  • An oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP-A-2013-114249 and paragraph numbers 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466; Compounds described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
  • An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
  • an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used.
  • Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
  • oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have
  • the molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
  • the photopolymerization initiator it is also preferable to use a combination of Irgacure OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and/or Irgacure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) and Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).
  • a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used as the photopolymerization initiator.
  • a radical photopolymerization initiator two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained.
  • the crystallinity is reduced, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the colored composition can be improved.
  • Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more photopolymerization initiators are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an infrared absorbing agent.
  • an infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm.
  • the infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 1800 nm or less.
  • the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less.
  • infrared absorbers examples include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like.
  • pyrrolopyrrole compound compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0037-0052 of JP-A-2011-068731, WO 2015/166873 Compounds described in Paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0033 and the like.
  • examples of the squarylium compound include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP-A-2011-208101, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0060 to 0061 of Japanese Patent No. 6065169, and paragraph number 0040 of WO 2016/181987.
  • Examples of croconium compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029.
  • As the iminium compound for example, compounds described in JP-A-2008-528706, compounds described in JP-A-2012-012399, compounds described in JP-A-2007-092060, International Publication No. 2018/043564 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0063 of.
  • Examples of the phthalocyanine compound include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153, oxytitanium phthalocyanine described in JP-A-2006-343631, and paragraph numbers 0013 to 0029 of JP-A-2013-195480.
  • Compounds described in Nos. 0029-0076 can be mentioned.
  • Examples of naphthalocyanine compounds include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153.
  • Dithiolene metal complexes include compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5733804.
  • metal oxides include indium tin oxide, antimony tin oxide, zinc oxide, Al-doped zinc oxide, fluorine-doped tin dioxide, niobium-doped titanium dioxide, and tungsten oxide.
  • metal borides include lanthanum boride.
  • Commercially available lanthanum boride products include LaB 6 -F (manufactured by Nippon New Metal Co., Ltd.).
  • the compound as described in international publication 2017/119394 can also be used.
  • commercially available products of indium tin oxide include F-ITO (manufactured by DOWA Hitech Co., Ltd.).
  • the infrared absorbing agent the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-197437, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-025311, the squarylium compound described in WO 2016/154782, and the patent No. 5884953. No. 6036689, squarylium compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5810604, squarylium compounds described in paragraphs 0090 to 0107 of International Publication No.
  • tungsten oxide represented by the following formula described in paragraph 0025 of EP 3628645 can also be used.
  • M 1 and M 2 represent an ammonium cation or a metal cation
  • a is 0.01 to 0.5
  • b is 0 to 0.5
  • c is 1
  • d is 2.5 to 3.
  • e 0.01 to 0.75
  • n is 1, 2 or 3
  • m is 1, 2 or 3
  • R is a hydrocarbon group optionally having a substituent represent.
  • the content of the infrared absorbing agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass.
  • the lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorbing agent, or may contain two or more types thereof. When two or more kinds of infrared absorbing agents are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound having a cyclic ether group.
  • Cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups.
  • the compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound).
  • a compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low-molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1000) or a macromolecule (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight-average molecular weight of 1000 or more).
  • the weight average molecular weight of the cyclic ether group is preferably from 200 to 100,000, more preferably from 500 to 50,000.
  • the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
  • Epoxy resin can be preferably used as the epoxy compound.
  • epoxy resins include epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of phenolic compounds, epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of various novolak resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, heterocyclic epoxy resins, glycidyl esters, epoxy resins, glycidylamine-based epoxy resins, epoxy resins obtained by glycidylating halogenated phenols, condensation products of silicon compounds with epoxy groups and other silicon compounds, polymerizable unsaturated compounds with epoxy groups and others and copolymers with other polymerizable unsaturated compounds.
  • the epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin is preferably 310 to 3300 g/eq, more preferably 310 to 1700 g/eq, even more preferably 310 to 1000 g/eq.
  • Examples of commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G -0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (these are epoxy group-containing polymers manufactured by NOF Corporation) and the like.
  • the content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass.
  • the lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more.
  • the upper limit is, for example, preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group, or may contain two or more types. When two or more compounds having a cyclic ether group are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a curing accelerator.
  • Curing accelerators include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds and the like.
  • the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of WO 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, JP 2013-041165 Compounds described in paragraphs 0186 to 0251 of the publication, ionic compounds described in JP 2014-055114, compounds described in paragraphs 0071 to 0080 of JP 2012-150180, JP 2011-253054 Alkoxysilane compounds having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2005-200557, compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of Japanese Patent No. 5765059, carboxy group-containing epoxy curing agents described in JP-A-2017-036379, and the like.
  • the content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber.
  • ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include paragraph numbers 0038 to 0052 of JP-A-2009-217221, paragraph numbers 0052-0072 of JP-A-2012-208374, paragraph numbers 0317-0317 of JP-A-2013-068814.
  • UV absorber examples include compounds having the following structures.
  • examples of commercially available UV absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.), Tinuvin series and Uvinul series manufactured by BASF, and Sumisorb series manufactured by Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd. .
  • UV-503 manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • Tinuvin series and Uvinul series manufactured by BASF and Sumisorb series manufactured by Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd.
  • Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd. Moreover, as a benzotriazole compound, the MYUA series made from Miyoshi oil and fats (Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016) is mentioned.
  • the ultraviolet absorber is a compound described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of UV absorber, or may contain two or more types. When two or more ultraviolet absorbers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
  • a silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and capable of forming a siloxane bond by at least one of hydrolysis reaction and condensation reaction.
  • Hydrolyzable groups include, for example, halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, acyloxy groups and the like, with alkoxy groups being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group.
  • Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth)allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group and isocyanate group. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferred.
  • silane coupling agent examples include N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -amino propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), ⁇ -aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM
  • silane coupling agent examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A-2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056-0066 of JP-A-2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more silane coupling agents are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant.
  • a surfactant various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants and silicone surfactants can be used.
  • the surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant.
  • surfactants reference can be made to surfactants described in paragraphs 0238-0245 of WO2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • JP 2014-041318 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064 (corresponding International Publication No. 2014/017669 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064) surfactants described in, JP 2011- Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP-A-132503 and surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • Commercially available fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, and F-144.
  • the fluorosurfactant has a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cleaved and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied is also suitable.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include Megafac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Mega Fac DS-21.
  • fluorosurfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound as the fluorosurfactant.
  • fluorosurfactants include fluorosurfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • the fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta)
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3000-50000, for example 14000. In the above compounds, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
  • a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in a side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, and RS-72-K.
  • compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
  • a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) is a surfactant.
  • m represents 1 or 2
  • n represents an integer of 1 to 4
  • a represents 1 or 2
  • X a + is a valent metal ion, primary ammonium ion, Represents secondary ammonium ion, tertiary ammonium ion, quaternary ammonium ion or NH4 + .
  • Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF company), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Fuji
  • Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie) and the like.
  • a compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
  • the content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one surfactant, or may contain two or more surfactants. When two or more surfactants are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant.
  • Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used as the phenolic compound. Preferred phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds. A compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred. As the aforementioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred.
  • the antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule.
  • Phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used as antioxidants.
  • a phosphorus antioxidant tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl ) oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like.
  • antioxidants examples include Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like.
  • antioxidants are compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in WO 2017/006600, compounds described in WO 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used.
  • the content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one antioxidant, or may contain two or more antioxidants. When two or more kinds of antioxidants are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may optionally contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.). Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are, for example, described in JP 2012-003225, paragraph number 0183 and later (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph number 0237), JP 2008-250074 paragraph The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • auxiliaries e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • the coloring composition of this invention may contain a latent antioxidant as needed.
  • the latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected with a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250°C, or heated at 80 to 200°C in the presence of an acid/base catalyst.
  • a compound that functions as an antioxidant by removing the protective group by the reaction is exemplified.
  • Examples of latent antioxidants include compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219.
  • Commercially available latent antioxidants include ADEKA Arkles GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film.
  • metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 and SiO 2 .
  • the primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, even more preferably 5 to 50 nm.
  • Metal oxides may have a core-shell structure. Moreover, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver.
  • a light resistance improver compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 of JP-A-2017-198787, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0029-0034 of JP-A-2017-146350, JP-A-2017-129774 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037, 0049 to 0052 of JP 2017-129674 JP 2017-129674 paragraph numbers 0031 to 0034, 0058 to 0059 compounds described in JP 2017-122803 paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 , compounds described in 0051 to 0054, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0025 to 0039 of WO 2017/164127, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0047 of JP 2017-186546, JP 2015-025116 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0019 to 0041 of JP-A-2012-145604, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0101-0125 of JP-A-2012-103475, compounds
  • the coloring composition of the present invention preferably does not substantially contain terephthalic acid ester.
  • substantially free means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, and more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Zero is particularly preferred.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts may be regulated.
  • perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid especially perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid especially perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group
  • its salt is 0.01ppb to 1,000ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts.
  • a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and salts thereof may be selected.
  • Compounds that can substitute for the regulated compounds include, for example, compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group.
  • the above contents do not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts within the maximum allowable range.
  • the water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass.
  • the water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (flatness, etc.) and adjusting the film thickness.
  • the viscosity value can be appropriately selected as necessary, and is preferably, for example, 0.3 mPa ⁇ s to 50 mPa ⁇ s, more preferably 0.5 mPa ⁇ s to 20 mPa ⁇ s at 25°C.
  • a method for measuring the viscosity for example, a cone-plate type viscometer can be used, and the viscosity can be measured in a state where the temperature is adjusted to 25°C.
  • the storage container for the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and known storage containers can be used.
  • a storage container a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resins and a bottle with a 7-layer structure of 6 types of resins for the purpose of suppressing contamination of raw materials and coloring compositions. It is also preferred to use Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351.
  • the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the stability of the coloring composition over time, and suppressing deterioration of components.
  • the coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned ingredients.
  • all components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to prepare a coloring composition, and if necessary, each component may be appropriately mixed as two or more solutions or dispersions. , these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of coating) to prepare a colored composition.
  • a process of dispersing the pigment when preparing the coloring composition.
  • mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like.
  • Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like.
  • beads with a small diameter or to increase the filling rate of the beads so as to increase the pulverization efficiency.
  • the process and dispersing machine for dispersing pigments are described in ⁇ Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia, Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005'' and ⁇ Dispersion Technology Centered on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) and Industrial Applications'' The actual practice of comprehensive materials, published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978", the process and dispersing machine described in paragraph number 0022 of JP-A-2015-157893 can be suitably used.
  • the particles may be made finer in the salt milling step. Materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step can be referred to, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-194521 and 2012-046629.
  • Bead materials used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel and glass.
  • An inorganic compound having a Mohs hardness of 2 or more can also be used for the beads.
  • the composition may contain 1 to 10000 ppm of the beads.
  • any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation.
  • PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene
  • PVDF polyvinylidene fluoride
  • polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyethylene, polyolefin resins such as polypropylene (PP) ( (including high-density, ultra-high-molecular-weight polyolefin resin).
  • PP polypropylene
  • polypropylene including high density polypropylene
  • nylon are preferred.
  • the pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01-7.0 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01-3.0 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.05-0.5 ⁇ m. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably.
  • the pore size value of the filter reference can be made to the filter manufacturer's nominal value.
  • Various filters provided by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (former Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used as filters. .
  • fiber-like filter media include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, and glass fiber.
  • Commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.), and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno.
  • filters different filters (eg, a first filter and a second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Also, filters with different pore sizes within the range described above may be combined.
  • the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing other components, the filtration with the second filter may be performed.
  • the filter can be appropriately selected according to the hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity of the coloring composition.
  • the film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above.
  • the film of the present invention can be used in optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the film of the present invention When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, the film of the present invention preferably has a hue of green, red, blue, cyan, magenta or yellow, and more preferably has a hue of green, red or yellow. preferable. Moreover, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred, and red pixels or green pixels are preferred. is more preferable, and green pixels are even more preferable.
  • the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. It is even more preferred to be present in the wavelength range. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm.
  • the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a green pixel.
  • the film of the present invention preferably has, for example, any one of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (4).
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film.
  • the minimum value of the ratio in the wavelength range of 800 to 1300 nm is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more).
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 850 nm or more.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 940 nm or more.
  • the maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and light transmission in the film thickness direction.
  • a film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 1040 nm or more.
  • the film of the present invention can be produced through the step of applying the coloring composition of the present invention.
  • the film manufacturing method further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixels).
  • a method for forming the pattern (pixels) includes a photolithography method and a dry etching method, and the photolithography method is preferable.
  • Pattern formation by photolithography includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of patternwise exposing the colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer. forming a pattern (pixels) by developing and removing the exposed portion. If necessary, a step of baking the coloring composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may be provided.
  • the colored composition layer of the present invention is used to form the colored composition layer on the support.
  • the support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. Examples thereof include glass substrates and silicon substrates, and silicon substrates are preferred. Also, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate.
  • the silicon substrate is formed with a black matrix that isolates each pixel.
  • the silicon substrate may be provided with an underlying layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
  • the surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80° when measured with water.
  • a known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition.
  • dropping method drop cast
  • slit coating method spray method
  • roll coating method spin coating
  • methods described in publications inkjet
  • ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc.
  • Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprinting methods and the like.
  • the application method for inkjet is not particularly limited.
  • the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (pre-baked). Pre-baking may not be performed when the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process.
  • the pre-baking temperature is preferably 150° C. or lower, more preferably 120° C. or lower, and even more preferably 110° C. or lower.
  • the lower limit can be, for example, 50° C. or higher, and can also be 80° C. or higher.
  • the pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
  • the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step).
  • the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
  • Radiation (light) that can be used for exposure includes g-line, i-line, and the like.
  • Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used.
  • Light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less includes KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength: 193 nm), etc., and KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm) are preferable.
  • a long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used.
  • the light when exposing, the light may be continuously irradiated and exposed, or may be irradiated and exposed in pulses (pulse exposure).
  • pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of short time (for example, less than millisecond level).
  • the dose is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 .
  • the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be selected as appropriate.
  • the exposure may be in an oxygen-free atmosphere, or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume).
  • the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100000 W/m 2 (eg, 5000 W/m 2 , 15000 W/m 2 or 35000 W/m 2 ). can be done.
  • the oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined.
  • the illuminance may be 10000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume and 20000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 35% by volume.
  • the unexposed areas of the colored composition layer are removed by development to form a pattern (pixels).
  • the development and removal of the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer can be performed using a developer.
  • the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portion.
  • the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30° C., for example.
  • the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the step of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
  • the developer includes an organic solvent, an alkaline developer, etc., and an alkaline developer is preferably used.
  • an alkaline developer an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable.
  • alkaline agents include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxylamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide.
  • ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide
  • benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide
  • choline pyrrole
  • piperidine 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecene
  • examples include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate.
  • a compound having a large molecular weight is preferable for the alkaline agent from the standpoint of environment and safety.
  • the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
  • the developer may further contain a surfactant. From the viewpoint of transportation and storage convenience, the developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and then diluted to the required concentration when used. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Rinsing is preferably carried out by supplying a rinsing solution to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed.
  • the nozzle for discharging the rinsing liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support.
  • the moving speed of the nozzle may be gradually decreased.
  • Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments for complete curing.
  • the heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240.degree. C., more preferably 200 to 240.degree.
  • Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulating dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the developed film satisfies the above conditions. .
  • the light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
  • Pattern formation by a dry etching method is a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; a step of forming a photoresist layer on the cured layer; a step of patternwise exposing the photoresist layer and then developing it to form a resist pattern; and etching the cured layer using the resist pattern as a mask. and dry etching using a gas.
  • a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment (post-baking treatment) after development are performed is desirable.
  • pattern formation by a dry etching method descriptions in paragraphs 0010 to 0067 of JP-A-2013-064993 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
  • optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention as described above.
  • Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred.
  • a color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its colored pixels.
  • the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.
  • the film thickness is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 5 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more.
  • the width of pixels included in the optical filter is preferably 0.4 to 10.0 ⁇ m.
  • the lower limit is preferably 0.4 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 0.6 ⁇ m or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 5.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.8 ⁇ m or less.
  • the Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
  • Each pixel included in the optical filter preferably has high flatness.
  • the pixel surface roughness Ra is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and even more preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example.
  • the surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (Atomic Force Microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco.
  • the contact angle of water on the pixel can be appropriately set to a preferable value, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110°. The contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT-A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.).
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is high.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 ⁇ cm or more, more preferably 10 11 ⁇ cm or more.
  • the upper limit is not specified, it is preferably 10 14 ⁇ cm or less, for example.
  • the volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
  • a protective layer may be provided on the surface of the film of the present invention.
  • the protective layer By providing the protective layer, it is possible to impart various functions such as blocking oxygen, reducing reflection, making the film hydrophilic and hydrophobic, and blocking light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.).
  • the thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01-10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1-5 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a protective layer-forming composition, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of adhering a molded resin with an adhesive.
  • Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, and polyimides.
  • Resins polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, polyol resins, polyvinylidene chloride resins, melamine resins, urethane resins, aramid resins, polyamide resins, alkyd resins, epoxy resins, modified silicone resins, fluorine Resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained.
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended to block oxygen, preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 .
  • the protective layer in the case of a protective layer intended to reduce reflection, preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
  • the protective layer contains organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index modifiers, antioxidants, adhesion agents, additives such as surfactants. may contain.
  • organic/inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, and titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like.
  • a known absorber can be used as the absorber for light of a specific wavelength.
  • the content of these additives can be appropriately adjusted, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
  • the protective layer the protective layers described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
  • the optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above.
  • the configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it functions as a solid-state imaging device.
  • a plurality of photodiodes and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like are provided on the substrate, forming the light-receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.). and a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the photodiode light receiving portion. and a color filter on the device protective film.
  • CCD charge-coupled device
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
  • the color filter may have a structure in which each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
  • the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each color pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179577, and International Publication No. 2018/043654.
  • an ultraviolet absorption layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging device to improve light resistance.
  • An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices (mobile phones, etc.) having an imaging function, but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and monitoring cameras.
  • the image display device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above.
  • image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices.
  • electroluminescence display devices For a definition of an image display device and details of each image display device, see, for example, “Electronic Display Device (by Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Institute, 1990)", “Display Device (by Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho ( Co., Ltd.) issued in 1989).
  • Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in “Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Choukai Co., Ltd., 1994)". There is no particular limitation on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied.
  • Diethylene glycol was used as a binder.
  • the kneaded material after kneading and polishing was washed with 10 L of water at 24° C. to remove the grinding agent and the binder, and was treated in a heating oven at 80° C. for 24 hours.
  • the resulting dispersion was heated at a temperature of 45° C. for 7 days.
  • the viscosity of the pigment dispersion was measured before and after heating, and the absolute value of the difference between the viscosity of the dispersion before heating and the viscosity of the dispersion after heating was calculated.
  • the viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured using a viscometer (TV-22 type viscometer, cone plate type, manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.).
  • the viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured by adjusting the temperature of the pigment dispersion liquid to 25°C.
  • the rate of increase in viscosity over time was calculated from the following formula, and the rate of increase in viscosity over time was evaluated according to the following criteria.
  • Time-dependent viscosity increase
  • C The rate of thickening over time is 15% or more and less than 25%
  • D The rate of thickening over time is 25 % or more
  • PG36 C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
  • PG58 C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
  • PG63 C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
  • G1 a compound having the following structure
  • PR122 C.I. I. Pigment Red 122 (red pigment, quinacridone pigment)
  • PR177 C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 (red pigment, anthraquinone pigment)
  • PR224 C.I. I. Pigment Red 224 (red pigment, perylene pigment)
  • PR254 C.I. I.
  • Pigment Red 254 red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment
  • PR264 C.I. I. Pigment Red 264 (red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment)
  • PR272 C.I. I. Pigment Red 272 (red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment)
  • PY129 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129 (yellow pigment, azomethine pigment)
  • PY138 C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138 (yellow pigment, quinophthalone pigment)
  • PY185 C.I. I.
  • Pigment Yellow 185 (yellow pigment, isoindoline pigment) a-1: a compound having the following structure A-1 to A-73:
  • the metal atoms described in the table below have the first ligands described in the table below (the first ligand and the second ligand for structural example (A-4)) Compounds of structural examples (A-1) to (A-73) that are coordinated. Each compound was synthesized by the method described in French Patent Application Publication No. 2013609.
  • D1 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000)
  • D3 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 17,000)
  • D4 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • D5 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • D6 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units.
  • D7 Acrylic block copolymer (EB-1) described in paragraph number 0219 of Japanese Patent No.
  • D9 DISPERBYK-142 (manufactured by BYK Chemie)
  • D10 Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 6000)
  • D11 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 7,500)
  • Dispersions G1-G102, Y1, R1-R6, g1 Dispersions G1-G102, Y1, R1-R6, g1 as described above
  • M1 A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of a left compound (hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and a right compound (pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) in a molar ratio of 7:3)
  • M2 a compound having the following structure
  • M3 a compound having the following structure
  • M4 succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (acid value 67 mgKOH/g)
  • M5 a compound having the following structure
  • M6 a compound having the following structure
  • W1 A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 14,000, percentage of repeating units is mol%, fluorosurfactant)
  • W2 compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 3000, silicone surfactant)
  • UV1 compound of the following structure
  • UV2 compound of the following structure
  • Antioxidant I1 a compound having the following structure
  • each coloring composition was applied by spin coating so that the film thickness after post-baking was 0.5 ⁇ m, and then a hot plate was applied. and heated at 100° C. for 2 minutes to obtain a colored composition layer.
  • the colored composition layer was exposed to an i-line stepper exposure device (FPA-3000i5+, manufactured by Canon Inc.) at an exposure dose of 1000 mJ/cm 2 through a 5.0 ⁇ m square dot pattern mask. exposed.
  • the glass wafer on which the colored composition layer after exposure is formed is placed on a horizontal rotating table of a spin shower developing machine (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and a developing solution (CD- 2000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd., 60% diluted solution) was used for puddle development at 23° C. for 60 seconds.
  • a spin shower developing machine DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.
  • a developing solution CD- 2000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd., 60% diluted solution) was used for puddle development at 23° C. for 60 seconds.
  • the glass wafer was fixed on a horizontal rotating table by a vacuum chuck method, and while rotating the glass wafer at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, deionized water was supplied in a shower form from an ejection nozzle from above the center of rotation for rinsing. and spray dried
  • a heat treatment (post-baking) was performed for 300 seconds using a hot plate at 200° C. to form pixels 1 .
  • a coloring composition for heat diffusion resistance evaluation is used, and the pixels 2 are formed in the same manner as the pixels 1 in the missing portions of the pixels 1 on the glass wafer. did.
  • the transmittance (spectroscopy 1) in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 700 nm was measured using a microscope system (LVmicro V, manufactured by Lambda Vision Co., Ltd.). Thereafter, the glass wafer on which pixels 1 and 2 are formed is heated at 260° C.
  • pixel 2 is examined using a microscopic system (LVmicro V, manufactured by Lambda Vision Co., Ltd.). was used to measure the transmittance (spectroscopy 2) in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 700 nm.
  • spectroscopy 1 and spectroscopy 2 of pixel 2 the maximum value of the amount of change in transmittance was obtained, and the thermal diffusion resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria.
  • the transmittance measurement was performed 5 times for each sample, and the average value of the results of 3 times excluding the maximum and minimum values was adopted.
  • the maximum value of the amount of change in transmittance means the amount of change at the wavelength in which the amount of change in transmittance of the pixel 2 before and after heating is the largest in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
  • the blue coloring composition 1 shown below was used for the coloring composition for heat-resistant diffusivity evaluation.
  • C The maximum value of change in transmittance is 4% or more and less than 5%.
  • D The maximum value of change in transmittance is 5% or more.
  • Blue colored composition 1 C. I. Pigment Blue 15:6 with 118.5 parts by weight of C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 (29.6 parts by mass), Dispersant D12 (51.9 parts by mass) and Solvent S1 (800 parts by mass) were mixed to obtain a mixture.
  • the resulting mixture was subjected to dispersion treatment using Ultra Apex Mill (trade name) manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo Co., Ltd. as a circulating dispersing device (bead mill) to obtain Dispersion B1.
  • the solid content of the obtained dispersion B1 was 20.0% by mass.
  • Dispersant D12 Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 20,000)

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Optical Filters (AREA)
  • Compositions Of Macromolecular Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are: a coloring composition comprising a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent, wherein the coloring agent contains a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom; a film; an optical filter; a solid-state imaging element; and an image display device.

Description

着色組成物、膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
 本発明は、着色組成物に関する。また、本発明は、着色組成物を用いた膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to coloring compositions. The present invention also relates to a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition.
 近年、デジタルカメラ、カメラ付き携帯電話等の普及から、電荷結合素子(CCD)イメージセンサなどの固体撮像素子の需要が大きく伸びている。ディスプレイや光学素子のキーデバイスとしてカラーフィルタが使用されている。カラーフィルタは、通常、赤、緑及び青の3原色の画素を備えており、透過光を3原色へ分解する役割を果たしている。 In recent years, due to the spread of digital cameras, camera-equipped mobile phones, etc., the demand for solid-state imaging devices such as charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensors has increased significantly. Color filters are used as key devices for displays and optical elements. A color filter usually comprises three primary color pixels of red, green and blue and serves to separate the transmitted light into the three primary colors.
 カラーフィルタの各色の着色画素は、着色剤を含む着色組成物を用いて製造されている。特許文献1には、着色剤に特定のキノフタロン化合物を用いた着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタの着色画素を形成することが記載されている。 The colored pixels of each color of the color filter are manufactured using a coloring composition containing a coloring agent. Patent Document 1 describes forming colored pixels of a color filter using a coloring composition using a specific quinophthalone compound as a coloring agent.
特開2021-102743号公報JP 2021-102743 A
 一般的に、カラーフィルタなどの光学フィルタは複数色の画素を有している。このような複数色の画素を有する光学フィルタは、1色ずつ画素を順次形成して製造される。 Generally, optical filters such as color filters have pixels of multiple colors. Such an optical filter having pixels of a plurality of colors is manufactured by sequentially forming pixels of each color.
 一方、着色組成物を用いて画素を形成した場合、隣接する他色の画素との間で着色剤の熱拡散が生じて、混色が生じることがあった。各色の画素の色分解性能の観点から、このような着色剤の熱拡散の発生は抑制することが望ましい。 On the other hand, when a pixel is formed using a coloring composition, color mixture may occur due to thermal diffusion of the coloring agent between adjacent pixels of other colors. From the viewpoint of the color separation performance of each color pixel, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of such thermal diffusion of the colorant.
 よって、本発明の目的は、着色剤の熱拡散の発生が抑制された膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することにある。また、本発明の目的は、着色組成物を用いた膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することにある。 Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a film in which thermal diffusion of a coloring agent is suppressed. Another object of the present invention is to provide a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition.
 本発明者の検討によれば、後述する着色組成物により上記目的を達成できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。よって、本発明は以下を提供する。
 <1> 着色剤と、樹脂と、溶剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記着色剤は、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Aを含む、着色組成物;
 式(1)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
 Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
 <2> 上記化合物Aにおける上記金属原子は、Cu、Zn、Ni、Al、Pd、Co、MnまたはFeである、<1>に記載の着色組成物。
 <3> 上記式(1)で表される化合物は、式(2)で表される化合物である、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物;
 式(2)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
 BおよびCはそれぞれ独立して環状構造を表す。
 <4> 上記式(2)のBは、式(B-1)または式(B-2)で表される基を表し、
 上記式(2)のCは、式(C-1)または式(C-2)で表される基を表す、<3>に記載の着色組成物;
 式(B-1)中、RB11~RB14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB11~RB14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XB11は、=O、=NHRXB1または=Sを表し、RXB1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
 式(B-2)中、RB21~RB26は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB21~RB26のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XB21は、=O、=NHRXB2または=Sを表し、RXB2は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
 式(C-1)中、RC11~RC14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC11~RC14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
 式(C-2)中、RC21~RC24は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC21~RC24のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XC21は、=O、=NHRXC1または=Sを表し、RXC1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である。
 <5> 上記着色剤は、緑色着色剤および赤色着色剤からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、<1>~<4>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <6> 更に、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む、<1>~<5>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <7> カラーフィルタ用である、<1>~<6>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物。
 <8> <1>~<7>のいずれか1つに記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。
 <9> <8>に記載の膜を有する光学フィルタ。
 <10> <8>に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。
 <11> <8>に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。
According to the studies of the present inventors, the inventors have found that the above-mentioned objects can be achieved by the coloring composition described later, and have completed the present invention. Accordingly, the present invention provides the following.
<1> A coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent,
The coloring composition comprises a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom;
In formula (1), R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring, and R 3 to R 7 two adjacent groups may be combined to form a ring,
R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the metal atom in the compound A is Cu, Zn, Ni, Al, Pd, Co, Mn or Fe.
<3> The colored composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the compound represented by the formula (1) is a compound represented by the formula (2);
In formula (2), R 3 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 may combine to form a ring,
R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
B 1 and C 1 each independently represent a cyclic structure.
<4> B 1 in the above formula (2) represents a group represented by formula (B-1) or formula (B-2),
The coloring composition according to <3>, wherein C 1 in formula (2) represents a group represented by formula (C-1) or formula (C-2);
In formula (B-1), R B11 to R B14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B11 to R B14 may combine to form a ring. often,
X B11 represents =O, =NHR XB1 or =S, R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 ;
In formula (B-2), R B21 to R B26 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 may combine to form a ring. often,
X B21 represents =O, =NHR XB2 or =S, R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 ;
In formula (C-1), R C11 to R C14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 may combine to form a ring. often,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 ;
In formula (C-2), R C21 to R C24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 may combine to form a ring. often,
X C21 represents =O, =NHR XC1 or =S, R XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 .
<5> The coloring composition according to any one of <1> to <4>, wherein the coloring agent contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a green coloring agent and a red coloring agent.
<6> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, which is used for color filters.
<8> A film obtained from the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>.
<9> An optical filter comprising the film according to <8>.
<10> A solid-state imaging device having the film according to <8>.
<11> An image display device comprising the film according to <8>.
 本発明によれば、着色剤の熱拡散の発生が抑制された膜を形成できる着色組成物を提供することができる。また、着色組成物を用いた膜、光学フィルタ、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a coloring composition capable of forming a film in which thermal diffusion of a coloring agent is suppressed. Also, a film, an optical filter, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device using the colored composition can be provided.
 以下において、本発明の内容について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む意味で使用される。
 本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さない基(原子団)と共に置換基を有する基(原子団)をも包含する。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、光を用いた露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線を用いた描画も露光に含める。また、露光に用いられる光としては、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等の活性光線または放射線が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
 本明細書において、構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表し、Phはフェニル基を表す。
 本明細書において、重量平均分子量および数平均分子量は、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ)法により測定したポリスチレン換算値である。
 本明細書において、全固形分とは、組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
 本明細書において、顔料とは、溶剤に対して溶解しにくい化合物を意味する。
 本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
The contents of the present invention will be described in detail below.
In the present specification, the term "~" is used to include the numerical values before and after it as lower and upper limits.
In the description of a group (atomic group) in the present specification, a description that does not describe substitution or unsubstituted includes a group (atomic group) having no substituent as well as a group (atomic group) having a substituent. For example, an "alkyl group" includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
As used herein, the term "exposure" includes not only exposure using light but also drawing using particle beams such as electron beams and ion beams, unless otherwise specified. Light used for exposure includes actinic rays or radiation such as emission line spectra of mercury lamps, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer lasers, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, and electron beams.
In the present specification, "(meth)acrylate" represents both or either acrylate and methacrylate, "(meth)acryl" represents both or either acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth) ) acryloyl” refers to acryloyl and/or methacryloyl.
In this specification, Me in the structural formulas represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, Bu represents a butyl group, and Ph represents a phenyl group.
As used herein, the weight average molecular weight and number average molecular weight are polystyrene equivalent values measured by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
As used herein, the term "total solid content" refers to the total mass of all components of the composition excluding the solvent.
As used herein, a pigment means a compound that is difficult to dissolve in a solvent.
As used herein, the term "process" includes not only an independent process, but also when the intended action of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
<着色組成物>
 本発明の着色組成物は、
 着色剤と、樹脂と、溶剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
 上記着色剤は、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Aを含むことを特徴とする。
<Coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention is
A coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent,
The coloring agent is characterized by containing a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom.
 本発明の着色組成物は、着色剤の熱拡散の発生が抑制された膜を形成することができる。上述した化合物Aは、金属原子に式(1)で表される化合物が配位して金属錯体を形成しているため、膜中での運動性が小さいと推測される。また、本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤中に、化合物A以外の着色剤を更に含む場合であっても、化合物Aが、化合物A以外の着色剤と相互作用して膜中での他の着色剤の運動性を低下させることができると推測される。このため、本発明の着色組成物を用いることで、着色剤の熱拡散を抑制された膜を形成することができたと推測される。 The coloring composition of the present invention can form a film in which thermal diffusion of the coloring agent is suppressed. Compound A described above forms a metal complex by coordinating the compound represented by the formula (1) to the metal atom, so it is presumed that the mobility in the film is small. Further, even in the case where the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention further contains a coloring agent other than compound A, compound A interacts with the coloring agent other than compound A to form a colorant in the film. It is speculated that the motility of other colorants can be reduced. Therefore, it is presumed that by using the coloring composition of the present invention, it was possible to form a film in which the thermal diffusion of the coloring agent was suppressed.
 本発明の着色組成物は、カラーフィルタ用または赤外線透過フィルタ用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。より詳しくは、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物や、赤外線透過フィルタ形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いることができ、カラーフィルタの画素形成用の着色組成物としてより好ましく用いられる。画素の種類としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、赤色画素、緑色画素または黄色画素であることが好ましく、赤色画素または緑色画素であることがより好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention is preferably used as a coloring composition for color filters or infrared transmission filters. More specifically, it can be preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels or as a coloring composition for forming infrared transmission filters, and is more preferably used as a coloring composition for forming color filter pixels. Pixel types include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, yellow pixels, and the like. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred, and red pixels and green pixels are preferable. More preferably, it is a green pixel.
 本発明の着色組成物を用いて厚さ0.65μmの膜を形成した際に、膜の光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。なかでも、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲と、575~625nmの波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。この態様において、光透過率が50%となる短波長側の波長は、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、光透過率が50%となる長波長側の波長は、580~620nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、585~615nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。このような分光特性を有する膜を形成できる着色組成物は、カラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として好ましく用いられる。 When a film having a thickness of 0.65 μm is formed using the coloring composition of the present invention, the wavelength at which the light transmittance of the film is 50% is preferably present in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm. More preferably in the wavelength range of 520 nm, even more preferably in the wavelength range of 480-520 nm. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm. A coloring composition capable of forming a film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter.
 以下、本発明の着色組成物に用いられる各成分について説明する。 Each component used in the coloring composition of the present invention will be described below.
<<着色剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は着色剤を含有する。着色剤としては、黄色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤、赤色着色剤、緑色着色剤、紫色着色剤、青色着色剤、黒色着色剤などが挙げられる。着色剤は、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。顔料は、無機顔料、有機顔料のいずれでもよいが、カラーバリエーションの多さ、分散の容易性、安全性等の観点から有機顔料であることが好ましい。また、着色剤には顔料誘導体を用いることもできる。
<<coloring agent>>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a coloring agent. Colorants include yellow colorants, orange colorants, red colorants, green colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, black colorants, and the like. The coloring agent may be a pigment or a dye. The pigment may be either an inorganic pigment or an organic pigment, but an organic pigment is preferred from the viewpoints of color variation, ease of dispersibility, safety, and the like. A pigment derivative can also be used as the colorant.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、顔料と顔料誘導体とを含むものであることが好ましい。顔料誘導体としては、色素骨格に酸基または塩基性基が結合した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。顔料誘導体の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して1~30質量部であることが好ましく、3~20質量部であることがより好ましい。顔料誘導体は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。 The coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a pigment and a pigment derivative. Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton. The content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30 parts by mass, more preferably 3 to 20 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
 顔料の平均一次粒子径は、1~200nmが好ましい。下限は5nm以上が好ましく、10nm以上がより好ましい。上限は、180nm以下が好ましく、150nm以下がより好ましく、100nm以下が更に好ましい。顔料の平均一次粒子径が上記範囲であれば、着色組成物中における顔料の分散安定性が良好である。なお、本発明において、顔料の一次粒子径は、顔料の一次粒子を透過型電子顕微鏡により観察し、得られた写真から求めることができる。具体的には、顔料の一次粒子の投影面積を求め、それに対応する円相当径を顔料の一次粒子径として算出する。また、本発明における平均一次粒子径は、400個の顔料の一次粒子についての一次粒子径の算術平均値とする。また、顔料の一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。 The average primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 1 to 200 nm. The lower limit is preferably 5 nm or more, more preferably 10 nm or more. The upper limit is preferably 180 nm or less, more preferably 150 nm or less, and even more preferably 100 nm or less. When the average primary particle size of the pigment is within the above range, the dispersion stability of the pigment in the coloring composition is good. In the present invention, the primary particle size of the pigment can be determined from the photograph obtained by observing the primary particles of the pigment with a transmission electron microscope. Specifically, the projected area of the primary particles of the pigment is obtained, and the corresponding circle equivalent diameter is calculated as the primary particle diameter of the pigment. Further, the average primary particle size in the present invention is the arithmetic mean value of the primary particle sizes of 400 primary particles of the pigment. Further, the primary particles of the pigment refer to independent particles without agglomeration.
 有機顔料および顔料誘導体の結晶子サイズは、0.1~50nmであることが好ましく、0.5~30nmであることがより好ましく、1~15nmであることが更に好ましい。結晶子サイズはX線回折装置を用いて回折角のピークの半値幅より求めることができ、シェラーの式を用いて算出される。有機顔料および顔料誘導体の結晶子サイズは、製造条件の調整、製造後に粉砕するなどの公知の方法で調整することができる。 The crystallite size of the organic pigment and pigment derivative is preferably 0.1 to 50 nm, more preferably 0.5 to 30 nm, and even more preferably 1 to 15 nm. The crystallite size can be obtained from the half width of the diffraction angle peak using an X-ray diffractometer, and is calculated using Scherrer's formula. The crystallite size of organic pigments and pigment derivatives can be adjusted by known methods such as adjustment of production conditions and pulverization after production.
(化合物A)
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Aを含むものが用いられる。
(Compound A)
As the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention, one containing a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom is used.
 式(1)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
 Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
In formula (1), R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring, and R 3 to R 7 two adjacent groups may be combined to form a ring,
R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
-R~Rについて-
 式(1)のR~Rが表す置換基としては、後述する置換基T、後述する式(R-1)で表される基および後述する式(R-2)で表される基が挙げられる。式(R-1)で表される基および式(R-2)で表される基以外の置換基は、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基、アリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、スルファモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロアリールアゾ基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基またはシリル基であることが好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基またはヒドロキシ基であることがより好ましい。
-Regarding R 1 to R 7-
Substituents represented by R 1 to R 7 of formula (1) include a substituent T described later, a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, and a group represented by formula (R-2) described later. are mentioned. Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) and the group represented by formula (R-2) are halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, and cyano groups. , nitro group, alkoxy group, aryloxy group, heteroaryloxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonyl amino group, arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxy A carbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an arylazo group, a heteroarylazo group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group or a silyl group is preferred, and a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a hetero An aryl group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group or a hydroxy group is more preferable.
 式(1)のRとRは結合して環を形成していることが好ましく、脂肪族炭化水素環、芳香族炭化水素環、複素環、環状ケトン、環状チオケトンまたは環状イミンを形成していることがより好ましく、式(B-1)または式(B-2)で表される基を形成していることが更に好ましく、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加を抑制することができるという理由から式(B-1)で表される基を形成していることが特に好ましい。
R 1 and R 2 in formula (1) are preferably combined to form a ring, and form an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring, a heterocyclic ring, a cyclic ketone, a cyclic thioketone or a cyclic imine. More preferably, it forms a group represented by formula (B-1) or formula (B-2), to improve the stability over time of the colored composition, the viscosity over time Forming a group represented by the formula (B-1) is particularly preferable because it can suppress an increase in the amount of the group represented by the formula (B-1).
 式(B-1)中、RB11~RB14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB11~RB14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XB11は、=O、=NHRXB1または=Sを表し、RXB1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
 式(B-2)中、RB21~RB26は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB21~RB26のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XB21は、=O、=NHRXB2または=Sを表し、RXB2は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である。
In formula (B-1), R B11 to R B14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B11 to R B14 may combine to form a ring. often,
X B11 represents =O, =NHR XB1 or =S, R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 ;
In formula (B-2), R B21 to R B26 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 may combine to form a ring. often,
X B21 represents =O, =NHR XB2 or =S, R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 .
 式(B-1)のRB11~RB14が表す置換基および式(B-2)のRB21~RB26が表す置換基としては、後述する置換基Tおよび後述する式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられる。式(R-1)で表される基以外の置換基は、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基、アリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、スルファモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロアリールアゾ基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基またはシリル基であることが好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、ニトロ基またはアルコキシ基であることがより好ましく、ハロゲン原子であることが更に好ましい。
 ハロゲン原子は、塩素原子、臭素原子またはフッ素原子であることが好ましく、塩素原子であることがより好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、および環状のいずれでもよいが、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加を抑制することができるという理由から、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖及び分岐のいずれでもよいが、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加を抑制することができるという理由から、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
The substituents represented by R B11 to R B14 in formula (B-1) and the substituents represented by R B21 to R B26 in formula (B-2) include a substituent T described later and a substituent represented by formula (R-1) described later. The group represented by is mentioned. Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, hetero aryloxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonylamino group, arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, arylazo group, heteroarylazo is preferably a group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group or a silyl group, more preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, a nitro group or an alkoxy group, and a halogen atom is more preferred.
A halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a fluorine atom, and more preferably a chlorine atom.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred because it can improve the stability of the coloring composition over time and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. is preferred, and linear is more preferred.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3. The alkoxy group may be either linear or branched, but is more preferably linear because it can improve the stability over time of the colored composition and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. .
 式(B-1)のRB11~RB14および式(B-2)のRB21~RB26は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、または、後述する式(R-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、水素原子またはハロゲン原子であることがより好ましく、ハロゲン原子であることが更に好ましい。
 化合物Aを、顔料誘導体として用いる場合には、RB11~RB14の少なくとも一つ、および、RB21~RB26の少なくとも一つは、式(R-1)で表される基であることも好ましい。
R B11 to R B14 in formula (B-1) and R B21 to R B26 in formula (B-2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or represented by formula (R-1) described later. is preferably a group that is a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and still more preferably a halogen atom.
When compound A is used as a pigment derivative, at least one of R B11 to R B14 and at least one of R B21 to R B26 may be a group represented by formula (R-1). preferable.
 式(B-1)のRB11~RB14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよいが、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加をより抑制できるという理由から、環を形成していないことが好ましい。また、式(B-2)のRB21~RB26のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよいが、粘度の経時的な増加をより抑制できるという理由から、環を形成していないことが好ましい。環を形成している場合、形成される環は、5員環または6員環であることが好ましい。形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基T、および、後述する式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子または後述する式(R-1)で表される基であることが好ましい。 Adjacent two groups among R B11 to R B14 of formula (B-1) may be bonded to form a ring, which improves the stability over time of the colored composition and reduces the viscosity over time. It is preferable not to form a ring because the increase can be further suppressed. Two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 of formula (B-2) may be bonded to form a ring. is preferably not formed. When forming a ring, the ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later, and a group represented by the formula (R-1) described later, and a halogen atom or a group represented by the formula (R-1) described later. preferable.
 式(B-1)のXB11は、=O、=NHRXB1または=Sを表し、=Oであることが好ましい。RXB1は、水素原子または置換基を表す。RXB1が表す置換基としては、アルキル基及びアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 X B11 in formula (B-1) represents ═O, ═NHR XB1 or ═S, and is preferably ═O. R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The substituent represented by R XB1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
 式(B-2)のXB21は、=O、=NHRXB2または=Sを表し、=Oであることが好ましい。RXB2は、水素原子または置換基を表す。RXB2が表す置換基としては、アルキル基及びアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 X B21 in formula (B-2) represents ═O, ═NHR XB2 or ═S, and is preferably ═O. R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The substituent represented by R XB2 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
 式(1)のR~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基T、後述する式(R-1)で表される基および後述する式(R-2)で表される基が挙げられる。 Two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) may combine to form a ring. The formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later, a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, and a group represented by formula (R-2) described later.
 式(1)のR~Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、ヒドロキシ基、ハロゲン原子または式(R-2)で表される基であることが好ましい。 R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a hydroxy group, a halogen atom or a group represented by formula (R-2).
 式(1)のR~Rの好ましい態様としては以下が挙げられる。
 ・R~Rが水素原子である態様。
 ・R~Rの少なくとも一つがアルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~3のアルキル基)で、残りが水素原子である態様。
 ・R~Rの少なくとも一つが後述する式(R-1)で表される基で、残りが水素原子である態様。
 ・R~Rの一つが後述する式(R-2)で表される基で、残りが水素原子である態様。
 ・R~Rの一つがヒドロキシ基で、残りが水素原子である態様。
Preferred embodiments of R 3 to R 7 in formula (1) are as follows.
- An embodiment in which R 3 to R 7 are hydrogen atoms.
- An embodiment in which at least one of R 3 to R 7 is an alkyl group (preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms) and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
- An embodiment in which at least one of R 3 to R 7 is a group represented by formula (R-1) described later and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
An embodiment in which one of R 3 to R 7 is a group represented by formula (R-2) described later and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
- An embodiment in which one of R 3 to R 7 is a hydroxy group and the rest are hydrogen atoms.
-Rについて-
 式(1)のRは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表す。Rが表す炭化水素基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基および芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられ、脂肪族炭化水素基であることが好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、1が特に好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~20であることが好ましく、6~12であることがより好ましく、6であることが更に好ましい。
 式(1)のRは、化合物の平面性が高まり、膜中での運動性が低下して熱拡散の発生をより抑制できるという理由から、水素原子であることが好ましい。
-About R8-
R8 in formula (1) represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group represented by R 8 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group and an aromatic hydrocarbon group, preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Moreover, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, still more preferably 1-3, and particularly preferably 1.
The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-12, even more preferably 6.
R 8 in formula (1) is preferably a hydrogen atom because the planarity of the compound is increased, the mobility in the film is reduced, and the occurrence of thermal diffusion can be further suppressed.
 式(1)のRは、Rと結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環であることが好ましい。形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tおよび後述する式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられる。 R 8 in formula (1) may combine with R 7 to form a ring. The ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later and a group represented by formula (R-1) described later.
-XおよびXについて-
 式(1)のXおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表す。XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよい。
- About X 1 and X 2 -
X 1 and X 2 in Formula (1) each independently represent —OH, —NHR X1 or —SH, and R 1 X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. When X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded.
 RX1が表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられる。アルキル基の炭素数は1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アルキル基およびアリール基はさらに置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては後述する置換基Tが挙げられる。 Substituents represented by R X1 include an alkyl group and an aryl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-20, more preferably 1-15, even more preferably 1-8. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-12. The alkyl group and aryl group may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the substituent T described later.
 式(1)のXおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OHであることが好ましい。 Preferably, X 1 and X 2 in formula (1) are each independently —OH.
-Lについて-
 式(1)のLは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。Lが表す2価の連結基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基、複素環基、式(C-1)で表される基および式(C-2)で表される基が挙げられ、式(C-1)で表される基または式(C-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加をより抑制できるという理由から、式(C-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
-About L1-
L 1 in formula (1) represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. The divalent linking group represented by L 1 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, a group represented by formula (C-1) and a group represented by formula (C-2). It is preferably a group represented by (C-1) or a group represented by formula (C-2), which improves the stability over time of the colored composition and can further suppress the increase in viscosity over time. For this reason, a group represented by formula (C-1) is more preferable.
 上記脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~5が特に好ましい。
 上記複素環基は、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基および複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基Tで挙げた基および式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられる。
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Moreover, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-10, and particularly preferably 1-5.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1-3. A heteroatom constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3-30, more preferably 3-18, and more preferably 3-12.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include the groups exemplified for the substituent T described later and the groups represented by the formula (R-1).
 式(C-1)中、RC11~RC14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC11~RC14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
 式(C-2)中、RC21~RC24は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC21~RC24のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XC21は、=O、=NHRXC1または=Sを表し、RXC1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である。
In formula (C-1), R C11 to R C14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 may combine to form a ring. often,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 ;
In formula (C-2), R C21 to R C24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 may combine to form a ring. often,
X C21 represents =O, =NHR XC1 or =S, R XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
*1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 .
 式(C-1)のRC11~RC14が表す置換基および式(C-2)のRC21~RC24が表す置換基としては、後述する置換基Tおよび後述する式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられる。式(R-1)で表される基以外の置換基は、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、シアノ基、ニトロ基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基、アリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロアリールチオ基、スルファモイル基、アルキルスルフィニル基、アリールスルフィニル基、アルキルスルホニル基、アリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロアリールアゾ基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基またはシリル基であることが好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ニトロ基、シアノ基またはアミノ基であることがより好ましく、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ニトロ基またはシアノ基であることが更に好ましく、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基またはシアノ基であることが特に好ましい。
 ハロゲン原子は、塩素原子、臭素原子またはフッ素原子であることが好ましく、塩素原子であることがより好ましい。
 アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、および環状のいずれでもよいが、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加を抑制することができるという理由から、直鎖または分岐であることが好ましく、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
 アルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましい。アルコキシ基は、直鎖及び分岐のいずれでもよいが、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させて、粘度の経時的な増加を抑制することができるという理由から、直鎖であることがより好ましい。
The substituents represented by R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) and the substituents represented by R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) include the substituent T described later and the formula (R-1) described later. The group represented by is mentioned. Substituents other than the group represented by formula (R-1) include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heteroaryl groups, cyano groups, nitro groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, hetero aryloxy group, acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group, alkylsulfonylamino group, arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heteroarylthio group, sulfamoyl group, alkylsulfinyl group, arylsulfinyl group, alkylsulfonyl group, arylsulfonyl group, acyl group, aryloxycarbonyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbamoyl group, arylazo group, heteroarylazo is preferably a group, a phosphino group, a phosphinyl group, a phosphinyloxy group, a phosphinylamino group or a silyl group, more preferably a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a nitro group, a cyano group or an amino group. A halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a nitro group or a cyano group is more preferred, and a halogen atom, a nitro group or a cyano group is particularly preferred.
A halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or a fluorine atom, and more preferably a chlorine atom.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3. The alkyl group may be linear, branched, or cyclic, but linear or branched is preferred because it can improve the stability of the coloring composition over time and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. is preferred, and linear is more preferred.
The number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group is preferably 1-10, more preferably 1-5, even more preferably 1-3. The alkoxy group may be either linear or branched, but is more preferably linear because it can improve the stability over time of the colored composition and suppress the increase in viscosity over time. .
 式(C-1)のRC11~RC14および式(C-2)のRC21~RC24は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、シアノ基または式(R-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、水素原子であることがより好ましい。
 化合物Aを、顔料誘導体として用いる場合には、RC11~RC14の少なくとも一つ、および、RC21~RC24の少なくとも一つは、式(R-1)で表される基であることも好ましい。
R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) and R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a nitro group, a cyano group, or in formula (R-1) is preferably a group represented, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
When compound A is used as a pigment derivative, at least one of R C11 to R C14 and at least one of R C21 to R C24 may be a group represented by formula (R-1). preferable.
 式(C-1)のRC11~RC14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよい。また、式(C-2)のRC21~RC24のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよい。形成される環は、5員環または6員環であることが好ましい。形成される環は、更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基T、および、後述する式(R-1)で表される基が挙げられ、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基またはシアノ基であることが好ましい。 Two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 in formula (C-1) may combine to form a ring. Two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 in formula (C-2) may combine to form a ring. The ring formed is preferably a 5- or 6-membered ring. The formed ring may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a substituent T described later and a group represented by formula (R-1) described later, preferably a halogen atom, a nitro group or a cyano group.
 式(C-2)のXC21は、=O、=NHRXC1または=Sを表し、RXC1は、水素原子または置換基を表す。RXC1が表す置換基としては、アルキル基及びアリール基が挙げられ、アルキル基であることが好ましい。 X C21 in Formula (C-2) represents ═O, ═NHR XC1 or ═S, and R 1 XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. The substituent represented by R XC1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group, preferably an alkyl group.
-置換基Tについて-
 置換基Tとして、次の基が挙げられる。ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子)、アルキル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキル基)、アルケニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルケニル基)、アルキニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルキニル基)、アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリール基)、ヘテロアリール基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリール基)、アミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のアミノ基)、アルコキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルコキシ基)、アリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールオキシ基)、ヘテロアリールオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリールオキシ基)、アシル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシル基)、アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニル基)、アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニル基)、ヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のヘテロアリールオキシカルボニル基)、アシルオキシ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルオキシ基)、アシルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアシルアミノ基)、アミノカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアミノカルボニルアミノ基)、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基)、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数7~30のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基)、スルファモイル基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイル基)、スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数0~30のスルファモイルアミノ基)、カルバモイル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のカルバモイル基)、アルキルチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルチオ基)、アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールチオ基)、ヘテロアリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリールチオ基)、アルキルスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニル基)、アルキルスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基)、アリールスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニル基)、アリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルホニルアミノ基)、ヘテロアリールスルホニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリールスルホニル基)、ヘテロアリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリールスルホニルアミノ基)、アルキルスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキルスルフィニル基)、アリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数6~30のアリールスルフィニル基)、ヘテロアリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のヘテロアリールスルフィニル基)、ウレイド基(好ましくは炭素数1~30のウレイド基)、ヒドロキシ基、ニトロ基、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、カルボン酸アミド基、スルホン酸アミド基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、メルカプト基、シアノ基、アルキルスルフィノ基、アリールスルフィノ基、アリールアゾ基、ヘテロアリールアゾ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基、ヒドラジノ基、イミノ基。これらの基は、さらに置換可能な基である場合、さらに置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、上述した置換基Tで説明した基、後述する式(R-1)で表される基および後述する式(R-2)で表される基が挙げられる。
-About Substituent T-
Substituent T includes the following groups. Halogen atom (e.g., fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), alkyl group (preferably alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkenyl group (preferably alkenyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkynyl group (preferably an alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), an aryl group (preferably an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heteroaryl group (preferably a heteroaryl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an amino group (preferably amino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxy group (preferably alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), aryloxy group (preferably aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), heteroaryloxy group (preferably carbon 1 to 30 heteroaryloxy groups), acyl groups (preferably acyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably alkoxycarbonyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), aryloxycarbonyl groups (preferably aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), heteroaryloxycarbonyl group (preferably heteroaryloxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acyloxy group (preferably acyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), acylamino group (preferably acylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), aminocarbonylamino group (preferably aminocarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms), alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms) , aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms), sulfamoyl group (preferably sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms), sulfamoylamino group (preferably 0 to 30 carbon atoms sulfamoylamino group), carbamoyl group (preferably carbamoyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylthio group (preferably alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), arylthio group (preferably arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms) group), heteroarylthio group (preferably heteroarylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonyl group (preferably alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), alkylsulfonylamino group (preferably 1 to 30 alkylsulfonylamino groups), arylsulfonyl groups (preferably arylsulfonyl groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), arylsulfonylamino groups (preferably arylsulfonylamino groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), heteroarylsulfonyl groups (preferably is a heteroarylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), a heteroarylsulfonylamino group (preferably a heteroarylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), an alkylsulfinyl group (preferably an alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) , an arylsulfinyl group (preferably an arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms), a heteroarylsulfinyl group (preferably a heteroarylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms), a ureido group (preferably a ureido group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms) ), hydroxy group, nitro group, carboxy group, sulfo group, phosphoric acid group, carboxylic acid amide group, sulfonic acid amide group, imide group, phosphino group, mercapto group, cyano group, alkylsulfino group, arylsulfino group, arylazo group, heteroarylazo group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, silyl group, hydrazino group, imino group; These groups may further have substituents if they are substitutable groups. Examples of the substituent include the groups described for the substituent T described above, the groups represented by the formula (R-1) described later, and the groups represented by the formula (R-2) described later.
-式(R-1)で表される基について-
 -LR1-(YR1   ・・・(R-1)
 式(R-1)中、LR1は単結合またはn+1価の連結基を表し、
 YR1は酸基または塩基性基を表し、
 nは1~4の整数を表し、LR1が単結合の場合、nは1である。
-Regarding the group represented by the formula (R-1)-
−L R1 −(Y R1 ) n (R−1)
In formula (R-1), L R1 represents a single bond or an n+1 valent linking group,
Y R1 represents an acid group or a basic group,
n represents an integer of 1 to 4, and n is 1 when L R1 is a single bond.
 式(R-1)のLR1は単結合またはn+1価の連結基を表す。YR1が塩基性基の場合は、LR1はn+1価の連結基であることが好ましい。 L R1 in formula (R-1) represents a single bond or an n+1-valent linking group. When Y R1 is a basic group, L R1 is preferably an n+1 valent linking group.
 LR1が表すn+1価の連結基としては、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基、複素環基、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-SO-、-NRL10-、-N<、-NRL10CO-、-CONRL10-、-NRL10SO-、-SONRL10-およびこれらの組み合わせからなる基が挙げられる。RL10は水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。 The n+1-valent linking group represented by L R1 includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, an aromatic hydrocarbon group, a heterocyclic group, -O-, -S-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -SO 2 -, -NR L10 -, -N<, -NR L10 CO-, -CONR L10 -, -NR L10 SO 2 -, -SO 2 NR L10 - and groups consisting of combinations thereof. RL10 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
 脂肪族炭化水素基は、飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよく、不飽和脂肪族炭化水素基であってもよい。また、脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましく、1~5が特に好ましい。
 芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~20であることが好ましく、6~12であることがより好ましく、6であることが更に好ましい。
 複素環基は、単環または縮合数が2~4の縮合環が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子の数は1~3が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成するヘテロ原子は、窒素原子、酸素原子または硫黄原子が好ましい。複素環基の環を構成する炭素原子の数は3~30が好ましく、3~18がより好ましく、3~12がより好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基および複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基などが挙げられる。
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be a saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group or an unsaturated aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Moreover, the aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-10, and particularly preferably 1-5.
The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-12, even more preferably 6.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a monocyclic ring or a condensed ring having 2 to 4 condensed rings. The number of heteroatoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 1-3. A heteroatom constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of carbon atoms constituting the ring of the heterocyclic group is preferably 3-30, more preferably 3-18, and more preferably 3-12.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon group, aromatic hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Substituents include alkyl groups and aryl groups.
 LR1が表すn+1価の連結基は、-O-と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基、-NRL10-と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基、または、-N<と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましく、-O-と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基または-NRL10-と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基であることがより好ましく、-O-と脂肪族炭化水素基とを組み合わせた基であることが更に好ましい。 The n+1-valent linking group represented by L R1 is a group obtained by combining —O— and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, a group obtained by combining —NR L10 — and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group, or —N< and an aliphatic It is preferably a group in combination with a hydrocarbon group, more preferably a group in which —O— is combined with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group or a group in which —NR L10 — is combined with an aliphatic hydrocarbon group. , —O— and an aliphatic hydrocarbon group are more preferred.
 式(R-1)のYR1は酸基または塩基性基を表す。YR1が表す酸基としては、-COOH、-SOH、および、-LY1-NH-LY2-RY1が挙げられる。LY1およびLY2はそれぞれ独立して-CO-または-SO-を表し、RY1は置換基を表す。 Y R1 in formula (R-1) represents an acid group or a basic group. Acid groups represented by Y R1 include -COOH, -SO 3 H, and -L Y1 -NH-L Y2 -R Y1 . L Y1 and L Y2 each independently represent —CO— or —SO 2 —, and R Y1 represents a substituent.
 LY1およびLY2の少なくとも一方は、-SO-であることが好ましく、LY2が-SO-であることがより好ましい。
 RY1が表す置換基としては、アルキル基およびアリール基が挙げられる。アルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としてはハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、フッ素原子であることがより好ましい。
At least one of L Y1 and L Y2 is preferably —SO 2 —, and more preferably L Y2 is —SO 2 —.
The substituent represented by RY1 includes an alkyl group and an aryl group. Alkyl groups and aryl groups may have substituents. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
 YR1が表す塩基性基としては、-NRY2Y3が挙げられる。RY2およびRY3はそれぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基であることが好ましく、アルキル基であることがより好ましい。アルキル基の炭素数は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、1~3が更に好ましく、1または2が特に好ましく、1が最も好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよいが、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。 Basic groups represented by Y R1 include —NR Y2 R Y3 . R Y2 and R Y3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group. The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, still more preferably 1 to 3, particularly preferably 1 or 2, and most preferably 1. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-12.
 -NRY2Y3において、RY2とRY3は結合して環を形成していてもよい。更に置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アリール基などが挙げられる。 In —NR Y2 R Y3 , R Y2 and R Y3 may combine to form a ring. Furthermore, it may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, and aryl groups.
 式(R-1)のnは1~4の整数を表し、1または2であることが好ましく、1であることがより好ましい。 n in formula (R-1) represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 1.
-式(R-2)で表される基について-
 式(R-2)中、R1a~R7aは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、R1aとR2aは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R3a~R7aのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 R8aは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、R8aとR7aは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 X1aおよびX2aは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 X1aとX2aがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、X1aとX2aは結合していてもよく、
 L1aは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
 ただし、R3a~R7aの一つは、式(1)との結合手であるか、または、式(1)との結合手を含む。
-Regarding the group represented by the formula (R-2)-
In formula (R-2), R 1a to R 7a each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 1a and R 2a may combine to form a ring, and R 3a to R 7a two adjacent groups of may be combined to form a ring,
R 8a represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8a and R 7a may combine to form a ring,
X 1a and X 2a each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
when X 1a and X 2a are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1a and X 2a may be bonded;
L 1a represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
However, one of R 3a to R 7a is a bond with formula (1) or includes a bond with formula (1).
 式(1a)のR1a~R8a、X1a、X2a、L1aは、式(1)のR~R、X、X、Lと同様であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 R 1a to R 8a , X 1a , X 2a and L 1a in formula (1a) are the same as R 1 to R 8 , X 1 , X 2 and L 1 in formula (1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. be.
 式(1)で表される化合物は、式(2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。
The compound represented by formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by formula (2).
 式(2)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
 BおよびCはそれぞれ独立して環状構造を表す。
In formula (2), R 3 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 may combine to form a ring,
R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
B 1 and C 1 each independently represent a cyclic structure.
 式(2)のR~R、XおよびXは、式(1)のR~R、XおよびXと同義である。 R 3 to R 8 , X 1 and X 2 in formula (2) have the same definitions as R 3 to R 8 , X 1 and X 2 in formula (1).
 式(2)のBが表す環状構造としては、脂肪族炭化水素環、芳香族炭化水素環、複素環、環状ケトン、環状チオケトンおよび環状イミンが挙げられ、式(B-1)または式(B-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(B-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 Cyclic structures represented by B 1 in formula (2) include aliphatic hydrocarbon rings, aromatic hydrocarbon rings, heterocycles, cyclic ketones, cyclic thioketones and cyclic imines, and may be represented by formula (B-1) or formula ( It is preferably a group represented by B-2), more preferably a group represented by formula (B-1).
 式(2)のCが表す環状構造としては、脂肪族炭化水素環、複素環、式(C-1)で表される基および式(C-2)で表される基が挙げられ、式(C-1)で表される基または式(C-2)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(C-1)で表される基であることがより好ましい。 The cyclic structure represented by C 1 of formula (2) includes an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring, a heterocyclic ring, a group represented by formula (C-1) and a group represented by formula (C-2), A group represented by formula (C-1) or a group represented by formula (C-2) is preferable, and a group represented by formula (C-1) is more preferable.
 化合物Aにおいて、式(1)で表される化合物が配位する金属原子としては、Cu、Zn、Ni、Al、Pd、Co、MnおよびFeが挙げられ、Cu、Zn、Ni、AlまたはPdであることが好ましく、Cu、Zn、NiまたはPdであることがより好ましく、Cu、ZnまたはNiであることが更に好ましく、CuまたはZnであることが特に好ましい。 In the compound A, the metal atoms coordinated by the compound represented by formula (1) include Cu, Zn, Ni, Al, Pd, Co, Mn and Fe, and Cu, Zn, Ni, Al or Pd is preferred, Cu, Zn, Ni or Pd is more preferred, Cu, Zn or Ni is even more preferred, and Cu or Zn is particularly preferred.
 化合物Aにおいては、これらの金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が1個配位していてもよく、2個以上配位していてもよい。また、金属原子には、式(1)で表される化合物以外の配位子(他の配位子)が更に配位していてもよい。配位子としては、ハロゲン原子(塩素原子、臭素原子、フッ素原子など)、ヘテロ環化合物(例えば、ピリジン、ピリミジン、イミダゾール、ピラゾール、トリアゾール、テトラゾール、キノリン、1,10-フェナントロリン等)、プロトン性化合物(例えば、水、メタノール、エタノール等)、アミン化合物(例えばトリエチルアミン、N,N,N’、N’-テトラメチレンジアミン、エチレンジアミン四酢酸N,N,N’,N’’,N’’-ペンタメチルジエチレントリアミンなど)、アミド化合物(例えば、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン等)、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン、ニトリル化合物(例えばアセトニトリル等)、リン酸エステル化合物などが挙げられる。また、化合物Aは2核錯体であってもよい。 In compound A, one compound represented by formula (1) may be coordinated to these metal atoms, or two or more compounds may be coordinated. Further, the metal atom may be further coordinated with a ligand (another ligand) other than the compound represented by formula (1). Ligands include halogen atoms (chlorine atom, bromine atom, fluorine atom, etc.), heterocyclic compounds (e.g., pyridine, pyrimidine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, tetrazole, quinoline, 1,10-phenanthroline, etc.), protic compounds (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol, etc.), amine compounds (e.g., triethylamine, N,N,N',N'-tetramethylenediamine, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid N,N,N',N'',N''- pentamethyldiethylenetriamine, etc.), amide compounds (eg, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N-methylpyrrolidone, etc.), dimethylsulfoxide, sulfolane, nitrile compounds (eg, acetonitrile, etc.), phosphate ester compounds, and the like. Compound A may also be a binuclear complex.
 化合物Aの一例としては、下記式(1-1)で表される化合物などが挙げられる。
Examples of compound A include compounds represented by the following formula (1-1).
 式(1-1)中、Mは、配位子が配位していてもよい金属原子を表し、
 R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
 X11およびX12は、それぞれ独立して、-O、-NX1またはSを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
 X11とX12がそれぞれ独立して-NX1である場合には、X11とX12は結合していてもよく、
 Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
In formula (1-1), M 1 represents a metal atom that may be coordinated with a ligand,
R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring, and two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 are may be combined to form a ring,
R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
X 11 and X 12 each independently represent -O- , -N - R X1 or S- , R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
When X 11 and X 12 are each independently -N - R X1 , X 11 and X 12 may be bonded,
L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
 式(1-1)のMが表す金属原子としては、上述した金属原子が挙げられる。金属原子に配位していてもよい配位子としては、上述した配位子が挙げられる。 Examples of the metal atom represented by M 1 in formula (1-1) include the metal atoms described above. The ligands that may be coordinated to the metal atom include the ligands described above.
 化合物Aの具体例としては、後述する実施例に記載の構造例(A-1)~(A-73)の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of compound A include compounds of structural examples (A-1) to (A-73) described in the examples below.
 化合物Aは、顔料であってもよく、染料であってもよい。また、化合物Aは、顔料誘導体であってもよい。化合物Aを顔料誘導体として用いる場合には、式(1)で表される化合物は、置換基として式(R-1)で表される基を有する化合物であることが好ましい。 The compound A may be a pigment or a dye. Compound A may also be a pigment derivative. When compound A is used as a pigment derivative, the compound represented by formula (1) is preferably a compound having a group represented by formula (R-1) as a substituent.
 化合物Aの極大吸収波長は、波長400~700nmの範囲に存在することが好ましく、波長400~600nmの範囲に存在することがより好ましい。 The maximum absorption wavelength of compound A is preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 400 to 600 nm.
(他の着色剤)
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤は、上記化合物A以外の着色剤(以下、他の着色剤ともいう)をさらに含有することができる。併用する他の着色剤としては、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤、黄色着色剤、紫色着色剤、青色着色剤、オレンジ色着色剤などが挙げられる。また、他の着色剤には、顔料誘導体を用いることもできる。
(other colorants)
The coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention can further contain a coloring agent other than the compound A (hereinafter also referred to as another coloring agent). Other colorants used in combination include green colorants, red colorants, yellow colorants, purple colorants, blue colorants, orange colorants, and the like. Pigment derivatives can also be used as other colorants.
 他の着色剤としては、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤、黄色着色剤およびオレンジ色着色剤からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、緑色着色剤、赤色着色剤および黄色着色剤からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種であることがより好ましく、緑色着色剤および赤色着色剤からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが更に好ましい。 The other coloring agent is preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent, a yellow coloring agent and an orange coloring agent, and a green coloring agent, a red coloring agent and a yellow coloring agent. It is more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of, and more preferably at least one selected from the group consisting of green colorants and red colorants.
 赤色着色剤としては、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物、ナフトール化合物、アゾメチン化合物、キサンテン化合物、キナクリドン化合物、ペリレン化合物、チオインジゴ化合物などが挙げられ、ジケトピロロピロール化合物、アントラキノン化合物、アゾ化合物であることが好ましく、ジケトピロロピロール化合物であることがより好ましい。また、赤色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましい。 Examples of red colorants include diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo compounds, naphthol compounds, azomethine compounds, xanthene compounds, quinacridone compounds, perylene compounds, thioindigo compounds, and diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds, anthraquinone compounds, azo It is preferably a compound, more preferably a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound. Also, the red colorant is preferably a pigment.
 赤色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.(カラーインデックス)ピグメントレッド1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,269,270,272,279,291,294,295,296,297等の赤色顔料が挙げられる。また、赤色着色剤として、特開2017-201384号公報に記載の構造中に少なくとも1つの臭素原子が置換したジケトピロロピロール化合物、特許第6248838号の段落番号0016~0022に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、国際公開第2012/117965号に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2020-085947号公報に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2012-229344号公報に記載のナフトールアゾ化合物、特許第6516119号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特許第6525101号公報に記載の赤色着色剤、特開2020-090632号公報の段落番号0229に記載の臭素化ジケトピロロピロール化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140741号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0140744号公報に記載のアントラキノン化合物、特開2020-079396号公報に記載のペリレン化合物、特開2020-066702号公報の段落番号0025~0041に記載のジケトピロロピロール化合物などを用いることもできる。また、赤色着色剤として、芳香族環に対して、酸素原子、硫黄原子または窒素原子が結合した基が導入された芳香族環基がジケトピロロピロール骨格に結合した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。 Specific examples of red colorants include C.I. I. (Color Index) Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48:4, 49, 49:1, 49:2, 52:1, 52:2, 53:1, 57:1, 60:1, 63:1, 66, 67, 81:1, 81:2, 81: 3, 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 269, 270, 272, 279, 291, 294, 295, 296, 297 and other red pigments. Further, as a red colorant, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound in which at least one bromine atom is substituted in the structure described in JP-A-2017-201384, a diketopyrrolopyrrole described in paragraphs 0016 to 0022 of Japanese Patent No. 6248838 Pyrrole compounds, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/102399, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in WO 2012/117965, brominated diketopyrrolo described in JP 2020-085947 Pyrrole compound, naphthol azo compound described in JP-A-2012-229344, red coloring agent described in JP-A-6516119, red coloring agent described in JP-A-6525101, paragraph of JP-A-2020-090632 Brominated diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds described in No. 0229, anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140741, anthraquinone compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0140744, JP 2020 A perylene compound described in JP-A-079396, a diketopyrrolopyrrole compound described in paragraphs 0025 to 0041 of JP-A-2020-066702, and the like can also be used. Also, as a red colorant, a compound having a structure in which an aromatic ring group in which a group having an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom or a nitrogen atom is bonded to an aromatic ring is bonded to a diketopyrrolopyrrole skeleton is used. can also
 赤色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントレッド122,177,254,255,264,269,272が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,264,272がより好ましく、C.I.ピグメントレッド254,272が更に好ましい。 As a red coloring agent, C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, 177, 254, 255, 264, 269 and 272 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 264, 272 are more preferred, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254, 272 are more preferred.
 緑色着色剤としては、フタロシアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物などが挙げられ、フタロシアニン化合物であることが好ましく、フタロシアニン顔料であることがより好ましい。また、緑色着色剤は顔料であることが好ましい。 Examples of green colorants include phthalocyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, etc., preferably phthalocyanine compounds, and more preferably phthalocyanine pigments. Also, the green colorant is preferably a pigment.
 緑色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,10,36,37,58,59,62,63,64,65,66等の緑色顔料が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として、1分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子数が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子数が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。また、緑色着色剤として中国特許出願第106909027号明細書に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102395号に記載のリン酸エステルを配位子として有するフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2018-180023号公報に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2019-038958号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-070426号公報に記載のアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-076995号公報に記載のコアシェル型色素などを用いることもできる。 Specific examples of green colorants include C.I. I. Green pigments such as Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, 62, 63, 64, 65 and 66 are included. Further, as a green colorant, a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine having an average number of halogen atoms of 10 to 14, an average number of bromine atoms of 8 to 12, and an average number of chlorine atoms of 2 to 5 per molecule. Pigments can also be used. Specific examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. In addition, as a green colorant, the compound described in Chinese Patent Application No. 106909027, the phthalocyanine compound having a phosphoric acid ester as a ligand described in WO 2012/102395, described in JP 2019-008014. The phthalocyanine compound, the phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2018-180023, the compound described in JP-A-2019-038958, the aluminum phthalocyanine compound described in JP-A-2020-070426, JP-A-2020-076995 The core-shell type dyes described in can also be used.
 緑色着色剤としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン7,36,58,62,63が好ましく、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36,58がより好ましい。
用いられる。
As a green coloring agent, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, 36, 58, 62 and 63 are preferred, C.I. I. Pigment Greens 36 and 58 are more preferred.
Used.
 オレンジ色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等のオレンジ色顔料が挙げられる。 Specific examples of orange colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. of orange pigments.
 黄色着色剤としては、アゾ化合物、アゾメチン化合物、イソインドリン化合物、プテリジン化合物、キノフタロン化合物およびペリレン化合物が挙げられる。黄色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214,215,228,231,232,233,234,235,236等の黄色顔料が挙げられる。 Yellow colorants include azo compounds, azomethine compounds, isoindoline compounds, pteridine compounds, quinophthalone compounds and perylene compounds. Specific examples of yellow colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 179, 180, 181, 182, 185, 187, 188, 193, 194, 199, 213, 214, 215, 228, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236 and other yellow pigments.
 また、黄色着色剤としては、下記構造のアゾバルビツール酸ニッケル錯体を用いることもできる。
As the yellow colorant, a nickel azobarbiturate complex having the following structure can also be used.
 また、黄色着色剤として、特開2017-201003号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-197719号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-171912号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0137~0276に記載の化合物、特開2017-171913号公報の段落番号0010~0062、0138~0295に記載の化合物、特開2017-171914号公報の段落番号0011~0062、0139~0190に記載の化合物、特開2017-171915号公報の段落番号0010~0065、0142~0222に記載の化合物、特開2013-054339号公報の段落番号0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-026228号公報の段落番号0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062644号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物、特開2018-203798号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-062578号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6432076号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-155881号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-111757号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2018-040835号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2017-197640号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2016-145282号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-085565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2014-021139号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209614号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-209435号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-181015号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-061622号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2013-032486号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2012-226110号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074987号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074986号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-074985号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-050420号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2008-031281号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特公昭48-032765号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-008014号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、特開2019-073695号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073696号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073697号公報に記載のメチン染料、特開2019-073698号公報に記載のメチン染料、韓国公開特許第10-2014-0034963号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-095706号公報に記載の化合物、台湾特許出願公開第201920495号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6607427号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033525号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033524号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033523号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033522号公報に記載の化合物、特開2020-033521号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045200号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045199号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/045197号に記載の化合物、特開2020-093994号公報に記載のアゾ化合物、特開2020-083982号公報に記載のペリレン化合物、国際公開第2020/105346号に記載のペリレン化合物、特表2020-517791号公報に記載のキノフタロン化合物、下記式(QP1)で表される化合物、下記式(QP2)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。また、これらの化合物を多量体化したものも、色価向上の観点から好ましく用いられる。
Further, as a yellow colorant, compounds described in JP-A-2017-201003, compounds described in JP-A-2017-197719, paragraphs 0011-0062, 0137-0276 of JP-A-2017-171912 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0010 to 0062 and 0138 to 0295 of JP-A-2017-171913, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011-0062 and 0139-0190 of JP-A-2017-171914, JP 2017 -Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0010 to 0065 and 0142 to 0222 of JP-A-171915, quinophthalone compounds described in paragraph numbers 0011-0034 of JP-A-2013-054339, paragraph numbers 0013- of JP-A-2014-026228 0058, the isoindoline compound described in JP-A-2018-062644, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-203798, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2018-062578, and the patent No. 6432076. Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-155881, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-111757, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2018-040835, JP-A-2017 -Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-197640, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2016-145282, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2014-085565, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2014-021139, in particular Quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-209614, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-209435, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-181015, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2013-061622 , the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2013-032486, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2012-226110, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2008-074987, the JP-A-2008-081565. Quinophthalone compounds, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074986, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-074985, quinophthalone compounds described in JP-A-2008-050420, JP-A-2008-031281 The quinophthalone compound described, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-B-48-032765, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2019-008014, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-6607427, and JP-A-2019-073695. The methine dye described, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073696, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073697, the methine dye described in JP-A-2019-073698, Korean Patent No. 10- Compounds described in 2014-0034963, compounds described in JP 2017-095706, compounds described in Taiwan Patent Application Publication No. 201920495, compounds described in Patent No. 6607427, JP 2020-033525 Compounds described in JP-A-2020-033524, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033523, compounds described in JP-A-2020-033522, JP-A-2020-033521 Compounds described in, compounds described in WO 2020/045200, compounds described in WO 2020/045199, compounds described in WO 2020/045197, described in JP 2020-093994 The azo compound, the perylene compound described in JP-A-2020-083982, the perylene compound described in International Publication No. 2020/105346, the quinophthalone compound described in JP-A-2020-517791, represented by the following formula (QP1) A compound represented by the following formula (QP2) can also be used. Moreover, those obtained by polymerizing these compounds are also preferably used from the viewpoint of improving the color value.
 式(QP1)中、X~X16は各々独立に水素原子又はハロゲン原子を表し、Zは炭素数1~3のアルキレン基を表す。式(QP1)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許第6443711号公報の段落番号0016に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
In formula (QP1), X 1 to X 16 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a halogen atom, and Z 1 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP1) include compounds described in paragraph number 0016 of Japanese Patent No. 6443711 .
 式(QP2)中、Y~Yは、それぞれ独立にハロゲン原子を示す。n、mは0~6の整数、pは0~5の整数を表す。(n+m)は1以上である。式(QP2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、特許6432077号公報の段落番号0047~0048に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。 In formula (QP2), Y 1 to Y 3 each independently represent a halogen atom. n and m are integers from 0 to 6; p is an integer from 0 to 5; (n+m) is 1 or more. Specific examples of the compound represented by formula (QP2) include compounds described in paragraphs 0047 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077.
 紫色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1,19,23,27,32,37,42,60,61等の紫色顔料が挙げられる。 Specific examples of purple colorants include C.I. I. Purple pigments such as Pigment Violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, 60, 61 are included.
 青色着色剤の具体例としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,29,60,64,66,79,80,87,88等の青色顔料が挙げられる。また、青色着色剤として、リン原子を有するアルミニウムフタロシアニン化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2012-247591号公報の段落番号0022~0030、特開2011-157478号公報の段落番号0047に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of blue colorants include C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15:1, 15:2, 15:3, 15:4, 15:6, 16, 22, 29, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, 87, 88, etc. pigments. An aluminum phthalocyanine compound having a phosphorus atom can also be used as a blue colorant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0022 to 0030 of JP-A-2012-247591 and paragraph number 0047 of JP-A-2011-157478.
 また、緑色着色剤または青色着色剤として特表2020-504758号公報に記載のジアリールメタン化合物を用いることもできる。 In addition, a diarylmethane compound described in JP-A-2020-504758 can also be used as a green colorant or blue colorant.
 各種顔料が有していることが好ましい回折角については、特許第6561862号公報、特許第6413872号公報、特許第6281345号公報、特開2020-026503号公報、特開2020-033526号公報の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、ピロロピロール顔料としては結晶格子面のうち(±1±1±1)の8個の面の中でX線回折パターンにおける最大ピークに対応する面方向の結晶子サイズが140Å以下であるものを用いることも好ましい。また、ピロロピロール顔料の物性については、特開2020-097744号公報の段落番号0028~0073に記載の通り設定することも好ましい。 Regarding the diffraction angle that various pigments preferably have, Japanese Patent No. 6561862, Japanese Patent No. 6413872, Japanese Patent No. 6281345, JP-A-2020-026503, JP-A-2020-033526. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. Also, the pyrrolopyrrole pigment has a crystallite size of 140 Å or less in the plane direction corresponding to the maximum peak in the X-ray diffraction pattern among the eight planes (±1±1±1) of the crystal lattice planes. is also preferred. Further, the physical properties of the pyrrolopyrrole pigment are preferably set as described in paragraphs 0028 to 0073 of JP-A-2020-097744.
 また、顔料としては、特許6744002号公報に記載のラマンスペクトルを有するハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を使用することも、分光特性を高める観点で好ましい。また、顔料としては、国際公開第2019/107166号に記載の接触角を制御したジオキサジン顔料を使用することも粘度調整の観点で好ましい。 As the pigment, it is also preferable to use a halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment having a Raman spectrum described in Japanese Patent No. 6744002 from the viewpoint of enhancing spectral characteristics. As the pigment, it is also preferable to use a dioxazine pigment with a controlled contact angle described in WO 2019/107166 from the viewpoint of viscosity adjustment.
 他の着色剤には染料を用いることもできる。染料としては特に制限はなく、公知の染料が使用できる。例えば、ピラゾールアゾ系、アニリノアゾ系、トリアリールメタン系、アントラキノン系、アントラピリドン系、ベンジリデン系、オキソノール系、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ系、ピリドンアゾ系、シアニン系、フェノチアジン系、ピロロピラゾールアゾメチン系、キサンテン系、フタロシアニン系、ベンゾピラン系、インジゴ系、ピロメテン系等の染料が挙げられる。 Dyes can also be used as other coloring agents. The dye is not particularly limited, and known dyes can be used. For example, pyrazole azo, anilinoazo, triarylmethane, anthraquinone, anthrapyridone, benzylidene, oxonol, pyrazolotriazole azo, pyridone azo, cyanine, phenothiazine, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine, xanthene, Phthalocyanine-based, benzopyran-based, indigo-based, and pyrromethene-based dyes can be used.
 他の着色剤には色素多量体を用いることもできる。色素多量体は、溶剤に溶解して用いられる染料であることが好ましい。また、色素多量体は、粒子を形成していてもよい。色素多量体が粒子である場合は通常溶剤に分散した状態で用いられる。粒子状態の色素多量体は、例えば乳化重合によって得ることができ、特開2015-214682号公報に記載されている化合物および製造方法が具体例として挙げられる。色素多量体は、一分子中に、色素構造を2以上有するものであり、色素構造を3以上有することが好ましい。上限は、特に限定はないが、100以下とすることもできる。一分子中に有する複数の色素構造は、同一の色素構造であってもよく、異なる色素構造であってもよい。色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2000~50000が好ましい。下限は、3000以上がより好ましく、6000以上がさらに好ましい。上限は、30000以下がより好ましく、20000以下がさらに好ましい。色素多量体は、特開2011-213925号公報、特開2013-041097号公報、特開2015-028144号公報、特開2015-030742号公報、国際公開第2016/031442号等に記載されている化合物を用いることもできる。 Pigment multimers can also be used for other coloring agents. The dye multimer is preferably a dye dissolved in a solvent and used. Further, the dye multimer may form particles. When the dye multimer is particles, it is usually used in a state of being dispersed in a solvent. The particulate dye multimer can be obtained, for example, by emulsion polymerization, and specific examples include the compounds and production methods described in JP-A-2015-214682. A dye multimer has two or more dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more dye structures. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be 100 or less. A plurality of dye structures in one molecule may be the same dye structure or different dye structures. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2,000 to 50,000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and even more preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30,000 or less, and even more preferably 20,000 or less. Dye multimers are described in JP-A-2011-213925, JP-A-2013-041097, JP-A-2015-028144, JP-A-2015-030742, WO 2016/031442, etc. Compounds can also be used.
 他の着色剤には、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0028160号公報に記載されたトリアリールメタン染料ポリマー、特開2020-117638号公報に記載のキサンテン化合物、国際公開第2020/174991号に記載のフタロシアニン化合物、特開2020-160279号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物又はそれらの塩、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069442号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069730号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069070号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069067号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0069062号公報に記載の式1で表される化合物、特許第6809649号に記載のハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料、特開2020-180176号公報に記載のイソインドリン化合物を用いることができる。他の着色剤は、ロタキサンであってもよく、色素骨格はロタキサンの環状構造に使用されていてもよく、棒状構造に使用されていてもよく、両方の構造に使用されていてもよい。 Other colorants include triarylmethane dye polymers described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0028160, xanthene compounds described in JP-A-2020-117638, and those described in WO2020/174991. phthalocyanine compounds, isoindoline compounds or salts thereof described in JP-A-2020-160279, compounds represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069442, Korean Patent Publication No. 10- Compound represented by Formula 1 described in 2020-0069730, Compound represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069070, Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069067 Compound represented by Formula 1 described, compound represented by Formula 1 described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0069062, halogenated zinc phthalocyanine pigment described in Patent No. 6809649, JP 2020-180176 An isoindoline compound described in JP-A-2004-203155 can be used. The other colorant may be a rotaxane, and the dye skeleton may be used in the cyclic structure of the rotaxane, may be used in the rod-like structure, or may be used in both structures.
 他の着色剤には、顔料誘導体を用いることもできる。顔料誘導体としては、色素骨格に酸基または塩基性基が結合した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。 Pigment derivatives can also be used for other colorants. Pigment derivatives include compounds having a structure in which an acid group or a basic group is bonded to a pigment skeleton.
 顔料誘導体を構成する色素骨格としては、キノリン色素骨格、ベンゾイミダゾロン色素骨格、ベンゾイソインドール色素骨格、ベンゾチアゾール色素骨格、イミニウム色素骨格、スクアリリウム色素骨格、クロコニウム色素骨格、オキソノール色素骨格、ピロロピロール色素骨格、ジケトピロロピロール色素骨格、アゾ色素骨格、アゾメチン色素骨格、フタロシアニン色素骨格、ナフタロシアニン色素骨格、アントラキノン色素骨格、キナクリドン色素骨格、ジオキサジン色素骨格、ペリノン色素骨格、ペリレン色素骨格、チオインジゴ色素骨格、イソインドリン色素骨格、イソインドリノン色素骨格、キノフタロン色素骨格、ジチオール色素骨格、トリアリールメタン色素骨格、ピロメテン色素骨格等が挙げられる。 Dye skeletons constituting pigment derivatives include a quinoline dye skeleton, a benzimidazolone dye skeleton, a benzoisoindole dye skeleton, a benzothiazole dye skeleton, an iminium dye skeleton, a squarylium dye skeleton, a croconium dye skeleton, an oxonol dye skeleton, and a pyrrolopyrrole dye. skeleton, diketopyrrolopyrrole dye skeleton, azo dye skeleton, azomethine dye skeleton, phthalocyanine dye skeleton, naphthalocyanine dye skeleton, anthraquinone dye skeleton, quinacridone dye skeleton, dioxazine dye skeleton, perinone dye skeleton, perylene dye skeleton, thioindigo dye skeleton, Isoindoline dye skeletons, isoindolinone dye skeletons, quinophthalone dye skeletons, dithiol dye skeletons, triarylmethane dye skeletons, pyrromethene dye skeletons, and the like can be mentioned.
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、ボロン酸基、カルボン酸アミド基、スルホン酸アミド基、イミド酸基及びこれらの塩等が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、アルカリ金属イオン(Li、Na、Kなど)、アルカリ土類金属イオン(Ca2+、Mg2+など)、アンモニウムイオン、イミダゾリウムイオン、ピリジニウムイオン、ホスホニウムイオンなどが挙げられる。カルボン酸アミド基としては、-NHCORX1で表される基が好ましい。スルホン酸アミド基としては、-NHSOX2で表される基が好ましい。イミド酸基としては、-SONHSOX3、-CONHSOX4、-CONHCORX5または-SONHCORX6で表される基が好ましく、-SONHSOX3がより好ましい。RX1~RX6は、それぞれ独立に、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。RX1~RX6が表すアルキル基及びアリール基は、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としてはハロゲン原子であることが好ましく、フッ素原子であることがより好ましい。 The acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, a boronic acid group, a carboxylic acid amide group, a sulfonic acid amide group, an imidic acid group and salts thereof. Atoms or atomic groups constituting the salt include alkali metal ions (Li + , Na + , K + etc.), alkaline earth metal ions (Ca 2+ , Mg 2+ etc.), ammonium ions, imidazolium ions, pyridinium ions, phosphonium ion and the like. As the carboxylic acid amide group, a group represented by —NHCOR X1 is preferable. As the sulfonic acid amide group, a group represented by —NHSO 2 R X2 is preferable. The imidic acid group is preferably a group represented by —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 , —CONHSO 2 R X4 , —CONHCOR X5 or —SO 2 NHCOR X6 , more preferably —SO 2 NHSO 2 R X3 . R X1 to R X6 each independently represent an alkyl group or an aryl group. The alkyl groups and aryl groups represented by R X1 to R X6 may have substituents. The substituent is preferably a halogen atom, more preferably a fluorine atom.
 塩基性基としては、アミノ基、ピリジニル基およびその塩、アンモニウム基の塩、並びにフタルイミドメチル基が挙げられる。塩を構成する原子または原子団としては、水酸化物イオン、ハロゲンイオン、カルボン酸イオン、スルホン酸イオン、フェノキシドイオンなどが挙げられる。 Basic groups include amino groups, pyridinyl groups and salts thereof, salts of ammonium groups, and phthalimidomethyl groups. Atoms or atomic groups constituting salts include hydroxide ions, halogen ions, carboxylate ions, sulfonate ions, and phenoxide ions.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、後述の実施例に記載の化合物、特開昭56-118462号公報に記載の化合物、特開昭63-264674号公報に記載の化合物、特開平01-217077号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-009961号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-026767号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-153780号公報に記載の化合物、特開平03-045662号公報に記載の化合物、特開平04-285669号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-145546号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-212088号公報に記載の化合物、特開平06-240158号公報に記載の化合物、特開平10-030063号公報に記載の化合物、特開平10-195326号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2011/024896号の段落番号0086~0098に記載の化合物、国際公開第2012/102399号の段落番号0063~0094に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/038252号の段落番号0082に記載の化合物、特開2015-151530号公報の段落番号0171に記載の化合物、特開2011-252065号公報の段落番号0162~0183に記載の化合物、特開2003-081972号公報に記載の化合物、特許第5299151号公報に記載の化合物、特開2015-172732号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-199308号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-085562号公報に記載の化合物、特開2014-035351号公報に記載の化合物、特開2008-081565号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-109512号公報に記載の化合物、特開2019-133154号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2020/002106号に記載のチオール連結基を有するジケトピロロピロール化合物、特開2018-168244号公報に記載のベンゾイミダゾロン化合物又はそれらの塩などが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the pigment derivative include the compounds described in Examples below, the compounds described in JP-A-56-118462, the compounds described in JP-A-63-264674, and JP-A-01-217077. Compounds described in, compounds described in JP-A-03-009961, compounds described in JP-A-03-026767, compounds described in JP-A-03-153780, described in JP-A-03-045662 The compound, the compound described in JP-A-04-285669, the compound described in JP-A-06-145546, the compound described in JP-A-06-212088, the compound described in JP-A-06-240158 , the compound described in JP-A-10-030063, the compound described in JP-A-10-195326, the compound described in paragraph numbers 0086 to 0098 of WO 2011/024896, WO 2012/102399 The compound described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0094 of, the compound described in paragraph number 0082 of WO 2017/038252, the compound described in paragraph number 0171 of JP 2015-151530, JP 2011-252065 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0162 to 0183 of, compounds described in JP-A-2003-081972, compounds described in Patent No. 5299151, compounds described in JP-A-2015-172732, JP-A-2014-199308 Compounds described in JP-A-2014-085562, compounds described in JP-A-2014-035351, compounds described in JP-A-2008-081565, JP-A-2019-109512 Compounds described in, compounds described in JP-A-2019-133154, diketopyrrolopyrrole compounds having a thiol linking group described in WO 2020/002106, benzimidazo described in JP-A-2018-168244 Ron compounds or salts thereof, and the like.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における着色剤の含有量は、40質量%以上であることが好ましく、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、55質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、80質量%以下であることが好ましく、75質量%以下であることがより好ましく、70質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the coloring agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 55% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 75% by mass or less, and even more preferably 70% by mass or less.
 着色剤中における顔料の含有量は、20~100質量%であることが好ましく、50~100質量%であることがより好ましく、70~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。また、着色剤中における顔料と顔料誘導体の合計の含有量は、25~100質量%であることが好ましく、55~100質量%であることがより好ましく、75~100質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the pigment in the colorant is preferably 20-100% by mass, more preferably 50-100% by mass, and even more preferably 70-100% by mass. Further, the total content of the pigment and the pigment derivative in the colorant is preferably 25 to 100% by mass, more preferably 55 to 100% by mass, and further preferably 75 to 100% by mass. preferable.
 着色剤中における化合物Aの含有量は、5質量%以上であることが好ましく、10質量%以上であることがより好ましく、15質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は100質量%とすることができ、95質量%以下とすることもでき、90質量%以下とすることもできる。 The content of compound A in the colorant is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, and even more preferably 15% by mass or more. The upper limit can be 100% by mass, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤が化合物Aと緑色着色剤とを含む場合、化合物Aの含有量は、緑色着色剤の100質量部に対して5~60質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、50質量部以下であることが好ましく、40質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention contains compound A and a green coloring agent, the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 60 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the green coloring agent. . The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物に含まれる着色剤が化合物Aと赤色着色剤とを含む場合、赤色着色剤の含有量は、化合物Aの含有量は、赤色着色剤の100質量部に対して5~50質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、40質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring agent contained in the coloring composition of the present invention contains the compound A and the red coloring agent, the content of the red coloring agent is 5 to 5 with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red coloring agent. It is preferably 50 parts by mass. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, more preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの緑色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤には黄色着色剤と緑色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、化合物Aは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。黄色着色剤と緑色着色剤との質量比は、黄色着色剤:緑色着色剤=30:70~70:30であることが好ましく、30:70~60:40であることがより好ましく、30:70~50:50であることが更に好ましい。また、化合物Aの含有量は、緑色着色剤の100質量部に対して5~60質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、50質量部以下であることが好ましく、40質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming green pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a coloring agent containing a yellow coloring agent and a green coloring agent. Also, compound A is preferably a yellow colorant. The mass ratio of the yellow coloring agent and the green coloring agent is preferably yellow coloring agent: green coloring agent = 30:70 to 70:30, more preferably 30:70 to 60:40, and 30: More preferably, it is 70 to 50:50. Also, the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the green colorant. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50 parts by mass or less, more preferably 40 parts by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの赤色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤には黄色着色剤と赤色着色剤を含むものを用いることが好ましい。また、化合物Aは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。黄色着色剤と赤色着色剤との質量比は、黄色着色剤:赤色着色剤=30:70~70:30であることが好ましく、30:70~60:40であることがより好ましく、30:70~50:50であることが更に好ましい。また、化合物Aの含有量は、赤色着色剤の100質量部に対して5~50質量部であることが好ましい。下限は、10質量部以上であることが好ましく、15質量部以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、40質量部以下であることが好ましく、30質量部以下であることがより好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming red pixels of a color filter, it is preferable to use a coloring agent containing a yellow coloring agent and a red coloring agent. Also, compound A is preferably a yellow colorant. The mass ratio of the yellow coloring agent and the red coloring agent is preferably yellow coloring agent: red coloring agent = 30:70 to 70:30, more preferably 30:70 to 60:40, and 30: More preferably, it is 70 to 50:50. Also, the content of compound A is preferably 5 to 50 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the red colorant. The lower limit is preferably 10 parts by mass or more, more preferably 15 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 40 parts by mass or less, more preferably 30 parts by mass or less.
 本発明の着色組成物をカラーフィルタの黄色画素形成用の着色組成物として用いる場合、着色剤中における黄色着色剤の含有量は30質量%以上であることが好ましく、40質量%以上であることがより好ましく、50質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。また、化合物Aは黄色着色剤であることが好ましい。黄色着色剤中における化合物Aの含有量は、20質量%以上であることが好ましく、25質量%以上であることがより好ましく、30質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は100質量%とすることができ、95質量%以下とすることもでき、90質量%以下とすることもできる。 When the coloring composition of the present invention is used as a coloring composition for forming yellow pixels of a color filter, the content of the yellow coloring agent in the coloring agent is preferably 30% by mass or more, and is 40% by mass or more. is more preferable, and 50% by mass or more is even more preferable. Also, compound A is preferably a yellow colorant. The content of compound A in the yellow colorant is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 25% by mass or more, and even more preferably 30% by mass or more. The upper limit can be 100% by mass, 95% by mass or less, or 90% by mass or less.
<<樹脂>>
 本発明の着色組成物は樹脂を含有する。樹脂は、例えば、顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させる用途や、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料等を着色組成物中で分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外を目的として樹脂を使用することもできる。
<<Resin>>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition or as a binder. A resin mainly used for dispersing a pigment or the like in a coloring composition is also called a dispersant. However, such uses of the resin are only examples, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such uses.
 樹脂の重量平均分子量は、3000~2000000が好ましい。上限は、1000000以下が好ましく、500000以下がより好ましい。下限は、4000以上が好ましく、5000以上がより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight of the resin is preferably 3,000 to 2,000,000. The upper limit is preferably 1,000,000 or less, more preferably 500,000 or less. The lower limit is preferably 4000 or more, more preferably 5000 or more.
 樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、酢酸ビニル樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール樹脂、ポリビニルアセタール樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリウレア樹脂などが挙げられる。これらの樹脂から1種を単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。環状オレフィン樹脂としては、耐熱性向上の観点からノルボルネン樹脂が好ましい。ノルボルネン樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、JSR(株)製のARTONシリーズ(例えば、ARTON F4520)などが挙げられる。また、樹脂としては、国際公開第2016/088645号の実施例に記載された樹脂、特開2017-057265号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-032685号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-075248号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-066240号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-167513号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-173787号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-206689号公報の段落番号0041~0060に記載された樹脂、特開2018-010856号公報の段落番号0022~0071に記載された樹脂、特開2016-222891号公報に記載されたブロックポリイソシアネート樹脂、特開2020-122052号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-111656号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2020-139021号公報に記載された樹脂、特開2017-138503号公報に記載の主鎖に環構造を有する構成単位と側鎖にビフェニル基を有する構成単位とを含む樹脂を用いることもできる。また、樹脂としては、フルオレン骨格を有する樹脂を好ましく用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する樹脂については、米国特許出願公開第2017/0102610号明細書の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、樹脂としては、特開2020-186373号公報の段落0199~0233に記載の樹脂、特開2020-186325号公報に記載のアルカリ可溶性樹脂、韓国公開特許第10-2020-0078339号公報に記載の式1で表される樹脂を用いることもできる。 Examples of resins include (meth)acrylic resins, epoxy resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, polyimide resins, Polyamide resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, vinyl acetate resins, polyvinyl alcohol resins, polyvinyl acetal resins, polyurethane resins, polyurea resins, and the like. One of these resins may be used alone, or two or more may be mixed and used. As the cyclic olefin resin, norbornene resin is preferable from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance. Commercially available norbornene resins include, for example, the ARTON series manufactured by JSR Corporation (for example, ARTON F4520). Further, as the resin, the resin described in the examples of International Publication No. 2016/088645, the resin described in JP-A-2017-057265, the resin described in JP-A-2017-032685, JP Resins described in JP-A-2017-075248, resins described in JP-A-2017-066240, resins described in JP-A-2017-167513, resins described in JP-A-2017-173787, Resins described in paragraph numbers 0041 to 0060 of JP-A-2017-206689, resins described in paragraph numbers 0022-0071 of JP-A-2018-010856, blocks described in JP-A-2016-222891 Polyisocyanate resin, resin described in JP-A-2020-122052, resin described in JP-A-2020-111656, resin described in JP-A-2020-139021, JP-A-2017-138503 A resin containing a structural unit having a ring structure in its main chain and a structural unit having a biphenyl group in its side chain as described in 1) can also be used. As the resin, a resin having a fluorene skeleton can also be preferably used. Regarding the resin having a fluorene skeleton, the description of US Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0102610 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein. In addition, as the resin, the resin described in paragraphs 0199 to 0233 of JP-A-2020-186373, the alkali-soluble resin described in JP-A-2020-186325, and the Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0078339. A resin represented by the formula 1 can also be used.
 樹脂として、酸基を有する樹脂を用いることが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、リン酸基、スルホ基、フェノール性ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。酸基を有する樹脂は、例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂として用いることができる。酸基を有する樹脂の酸価は、30~500mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、50mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、70mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、400mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、120mgKOH/g以下が最も好ましい。 It is preferable to use a resin having an acid group as the resin. Examples of acid groups include carboxy groups, phosphoric acid groups, sulfo groups, and phenolic hydroxy groups. Only one kind of these acid groups may be used, or two or more kinds thereof may be used. A resin having an acid group can be used, for example, as an alkali-soluble resin. The acid value of the resin having acid groups is preferably 30-500 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 50 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 70 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 400 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, still more preferably 150 mgKOH/g or less, and most preferably 120 mgKOH/g or less.
 本発明の着色組成物は、塩基性基を有する樹脂を含むことも好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有する共重合体であることがより好ましく、塩基性基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位と、塩基性基を含まない繰り返し単位とを有するブロック共重合体であることが更に好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂は分散剤として用いることもできる。塩基性基を有する樹脂のアミン価は、5~300mgKOH/gが好ましい。下限は、10mgKOH/g以上が好ましく、20mgKOH/g以上がより好ましい。上限は、200mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、100mgKOH/g以下がより好ましい。塩基性基を有する樹脂に含まれる塩基性基としては、下記式(a-1)で表される基、下記式(a-2)で表される基などが挙げられる。
The coloring composition of the present invention also preferably contains a resin having a basic group. The resin having a basic group is preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having a basic group in its side chain. It is more preferably a polymer, and more preferably a block copolymer having a repeating unit having a basic group on its side chain and a repeating unit containing no basic group. Resins having basic groups can also be used as dispersants. The amine value of the resin having basic groups is preferably 5-300 mgKOH/g. The lower limit is preferably 10 mgKOH/g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH/g or more. The upper limit is preferably 200 mgKOH/g or less, more preferably 100 mgKOH/g or less. Examples of the basic group contained in the resin having a basic group include groups represented by the following formula (a-1) and groups represented by the following formula (a-2).
 式(a-1)中、Ra1およびRa2は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表し、Ra1とRa2とは結合して環を形成していてもよい;
 式(a-2)中、Ra11は、水素原子、ヒドロキシ基、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、アリールオキシ基、アシル基またはオキシラジカルを表し、Ra12~Ra19は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
In formula (a-1), R a1 and R a2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, and R a1 and R a2 may combine to form a ring;
In formula (a-2), R a11 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxy group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group or an oxy radical, and R a12 to R a19 each independently , represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
 Ra1、Ra2、Ra11~Ra19が表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましく、1~5が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよく、直鎖または分岐が好ましく、直鎖がより好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl groups represented by R a1 , R a2 and R a11 to R a19 is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-15, still more preferably 1-8, and particularly preferably 1-5. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic, preferably linear or branched, more preferably linear. The alkyl group may have a substituent.
 Ra1、Ra2、Ra11~Ra19が表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリール基は置換基を有していてもよい。 The aryl group represented by R a1 , R a2 and R a11 to R a19 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent.
 Ra11が表すアルコキシ基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~8が更に好ましく、1~5が特に好ましい。アルコキシ基は置換基を有していてもよい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkoxy group represented by R a11 is preferably 1 to 30, more preferably 1 to 15, even more preferably 1 to 8, and particularly preferably 1 to 5. The alkoxy group may have a substituent.
 Ra11が表すアリールオキシ基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~12が更に好ましい。アリールオキシ基は置換基を有していてもよい。 The aryloxy group represented by R a11 preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 6 to 12 carbon atoms. The aryloxy group may have a substituent.
 Ra11が表すアシル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~20がより好ましく、2~12が更に好ましい。アシル基は置換基を有していてもよい。 The acyl group represented by R a11 preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 12 carbon atoms. The acyl group may have a substituent.
 塩基性基を有する樹脂の市販品としては、DISPERBYK-161、162、163、164、166、167、168、174、182、183、184、185、2000、2001、2050、2150、2163、2164、BYK-LPN6919(以上、ビックケミー・ジャパン社製)、SOLSPERSE11200、13240、13650、13940、24000、26000、28000、32000、32500、32550、32600、33000、34750、35100、35200、37500,38500,39000,53095、56000、7100(以上、日本ルーブリゾール社製)、Efka PX 4300、4330、4046、4060、4080(以上、BASF社製)等が挙げられる。また、塩基性基を有する樹脂は、特開2014-219665号公報の段落番号0063~0112に記載されたブロック共重合体(B)、特開2018-156021号公報の段落番号0046~0076に記載されたブロック共重合体A1を用いることもでき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Commercially available resins having basic groups include DISPERBYK-161, 162, 163, 164, 166, 167, 168, 174, 182, 183, 184, 185, 2000, 2001, 2050, 2150, 2163, 2164, BYK-LPN6919 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie Japan), SOLSPERSE11200, 13240, 13650, 13940, 24000, 26000, 28000, 32000, 32500, 32550, 32600, 33000, 34750, 35100, 35200, 375 00, 38500, 39000, 53095 , 56000, 7100 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol), Efka PX 4300, 4330, 4046, 4060, 4080 (manufactured by BASF). Further, the resin having a basic group is a block copolymer (B) described in paragraph numbers 0063 to 0112 of JP-A-2014-219665, and described in paragraph numbers 0046-0076 of JP-A-2018-156021. block copolymers A1 can also be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とをそれぞれ含むことも好ましい。この態様によれば、着色組成物の保存安定性をより向上できる。酸基を有する樹脂と塩基性基を有する樹脂とを併用する場合、塩基性基を有する樹脂の含有量は、酸基を有する樹脂の100質量部に対して20~500質量部であることが好ましく、30~300質量部であることがより好ましく、50~200質量部であることが更に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group. According to this aspect, the storage stability of the coloring composition can be further improved. When a resin having an acid group and a resin having a basic group are used in combination, the content of the resin having a basic group is 20 to 500 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the resin having an acid group. It is preferably from 30 to 300 parts by mass, and even more preferably from 50 to 200 parts by mass.
 樹脂としては、式(ED1)で示される化合物および/または式(ED2)で表される化合物(以下、これらの化合物を「エーテルダイマー」と称することもある。)由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含むことも好ましい。 As the resin, a resin containing a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the formula (ED1) and/or a compound represented by the formula (ED2) (hereinafter, these compounds may be referred to as an "ether dimer"). It is also preferred to include
 式(ED1)中、RおよびRは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子または置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~25の炭化水素基を表す。
 式(ED2)中、Rは、水素原子または炭素数1~30の有機基を表す。式(ED2)の具体例としては、特開2010-168539号公報の記載を参酌できる。
In formula (ED1), R 1 and R 2 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
In formula (ED2), R represents a hydrogen atom or an organic group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms. As a specific example of the formula (ED2), the description in JP-A-2010-168539 can be referred to.
 エーテルダイマーの具体例については、特開2013-029760号公報の段落番号0317を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 For specific examples of ether dimers, paragraph number 0317 of JP-A-2013-029760 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein.
 樹脂としては、重合性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を含むことも好ましい。重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基などが挙げられる。 The resin preferably contains a resin containing a repeating unit having a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymerizable group include ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups.
 樹脂としては、式(X)で表される化合物由来の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂を用いることも好ましい。
 式中、Rは水素原子またはメチル基を表し、R21およびR22はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表し、nは0~15の整数を表す。R21およびR22が表すアルキレン基の炭素数は1~10であることが好ましく、1~5であることがより好ましく、1~3であることが更に好ましく、2または3であることが特に好ましい。nは0~15の整数を表し、0~5の整数であることが好ましく、0~4の整数であることがより好ましく、0~3の整数であることが更に好ましい。
As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin containing a repeating unit derived from the compound represented by formula (X).
In the formula, R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R 21 and R 22 each independently represent an alkylene group, and n represents an integer of 0-15. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group represented by R 21 and R 22 is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, even more preferably 1 to 3, particularly 2 or 3. preferable. n represents an integer of 0 to 15, preferably an integer of 0 to 5, more preferably an integer of 0 to 4, and even more preferably an integer of 0 to 3.
 式(X)で表される化合物としては、パラクミルフェノールのエチレンオキサイドまたはプロピレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。市販品としては、アロニックスM-110(東亞合成(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the compound represented by formula (X) include ethylene oxide- or propylene oxide-modified (meth)acrylate of paracumylphenol. Commercially available products include Aronix M-110 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
 樹脂としては、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂(以下、樹脂Acともいう)を用いることも好ましい。樹脂Acにおいて、芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていてもよく、繰り返し単位の側鎖に含まれていてもよい。芳香族カルボキシ基は繰り返し単位の主鎖に含まれていることが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、芳香族カルボキシ基とは、芳香族環にカルボキシ基が1個以上結合した構造の基のことである。芳香族カルボキシ基において、芳香族環に結合したカルボキシ基の数は、1~4個であることが好ましく、1~2個であることがより好ましい。 As the resin, it is also preferable to use a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (hereinafter also referred to as resin Ac). In Resin Ac, the aromatic carboxy group may be contained in the main chain of the repeating unit or may be contained in the side chain of the repeating unit. The aromatic carboxy group is preferably contained in the main chain of the repeating unit. In this specification, an aromatic carboxy group is a group having a structure in which one or more carboxy groups are bonded to an aromatic ring. In the aromatic carboxy group, the number of carboxy groups bonded to the aromatic ring is preferably 1-4, more preferably 1-2.
 樹脂Acは、式(Ac-1)で表される繰り返し単位および式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。
 式(Ac-1)中、Arは芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、Lは、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、Lは、2価の連結基を表す。
 式(Ac-2)中、Ar10は芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基を表し、L11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、L12は3価の連結基を表し、P10はポリマー鎖を表す。
Resin Ac is preferably a resin containing at least one repeating unit selected from repeating units represented by formula (Ac-1) and repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2).
In formula (Ac-1), Ar 1 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group, L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, and L 2 represents a divalent linking group.
In formula (Ac-2), Ar 10 represents a group containing an aromatic carboxyl group, L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, L 12 represents a trivalent linking group, and P 10 represents a polymer represents a chain.
 式(Ac-1)においてArが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造、芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物から由来する構造などが挙げられる。芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物および芳香族テトラカルボン酸無水物としては、下記構造の化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of the aromatic carboxy group-containing group represented by Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1) include structures derived from aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydrides, structures derived from aromatic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides, and the like. Aromatic tricarboxylic anhydrides and aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydrides include compounds having the following structures.
 上記式中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、下記式(Q-1)で表される基または下記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
In the above formula, Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, represented by the following formula (Q-1) or a group represented by the following formula (Q-2).
 Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基は、重合性基を有していてもよい。重合性基は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基および環状エーテル基であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基であることがより好ましい。Arが表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基の具体例としては、式(Ar-11)で表される基、式(Ar-12)で表される基、式(Ar-13)で表される基などが挙げられる。
The group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 1 may have a polymerizable group. The polymerizable group is preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group and a cyclic ether group, more preferably an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Specific examples of the group containing an aromatic carboxy group represented by Ar 1 include a group represented by formula (Ar-11), a group represented by formula (Ar-12), and a group represented by formula (Ar-13). and the like.
 式(Ar-11)中、n1は1~4の整数を表し、1または2であることが好ましく、2であることがより好ましい。
 式(Ar-12)中、n2は1~8の整数を表し、1~4の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、2であることが更に好ましい。
 式(Ar-13)中、n3およびn4はそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表し、0~2の整数であることが好ましく、1または2であることがより好ましく、1であることが更に好ましい。ただし、n3およびn4の少なくとも一方は1以上の整数である。
 式(Ar-13)中、Qは、単結合、-O-、-CO-、-COOCHCHOCO-、-SO-、-C(CF-、上記式(Q-1)で表される基または上記式(Q-2)で表される基を表す。
 式(Ar-11)~(Ar-13)中、*1はLとの結合位置を表す。
In formula (Ar-11), n1 represents an integer of 1 to 4, preferably 1 or 2, more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-12), n2 represents an integer of 1 to 8, preferably an integer of 1 to 4, more preferably 1 or 2, and still more preferably 2.
In formula (Ar-13), n3 and n4 each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, preferably an integer of 0 to 2, more preferably 1 or 2, preferably 1 More preferred. However, at least one of n3 and n4 is an integer of 1 or more.
In formula (Ar-13), Q 1 is a single bond, -O-, -CO-, -COOCH 2 CH 2 OCO-, -SO 2 -, -C(CF 3 ) 2 -, the above formula (Q- 1) or a group represented by the above formula (Q-2).
In formulas (Ar-11) to (Ar-13), *1 represents the bonding position with L1 .
 式(Ac-1)においてLは、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-1), L 1 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
 式(Ac-1)においてLが表す2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。Lが表す2価の連結基は、-L2a-O-で表される基であることが好ましい。L2aは、アルキレン基;アリーレン基;アルキレン基とアリーレン基とを組み合わせた基;アルキレン基およびアリーレン基から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、アルキレン基であることが好ましい。アルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。アルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。アルキレン基およびアリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。 The divalent linking group represented by L 2 in formula (Ac-1) includes an alkylene group, an arylene group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and these A group obtained by combining two or more of The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The arylene group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and even more preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. The divalent linking group represented by L 2 is preferably a group represented by -L 2a -O-. L 2a is an alkylene group; an arylene group; a combination of an alkylene group and an arylene group; at least one selected from an alkylene group and an arylene group; Examples include groups in which at least one selected from —NH— and —S— are combined, and alkylene groups are preferred. The number of carbon atoms in the alkylene group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. An alkylene group and an arylene group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent.
 式(Ac-2)においてAr10が表す芳香族カルボキシ基を含む基としては、式(Ac-1)のArと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 The group containing an aromatic carboxyl group represented by Ar 10 in formula (Ac-2) has the same meaning as Ar 1 in formula (Ac-1), and the preferred range is also the same.
 式(Ac-2)においてL11は、-COO-または-CONH-を表し、-COO-を表すことが好ましい。 In formula (Ac-2), L 11 represents -COO- or -CONH-, preferably -COO-.
 式(Ac-2)においてL12が表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-、-S-およびこれらの2種以上を組み合わせた基が挙げられる。炭化水素基は、脂肪族炭化水素基、芳香族炭化水素基が挙げられる。脂肪族炭化水素基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~20がより好ましく、1~15が更に好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれでもよい。芳香族炭化水素基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。炭化水素基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、ヒドロキシ基などが挙げられる。L12が表す3価の連結基は、式(L12-1)で表される基であることが好ましく、式(L12-2)で表される基であることがより好ましい。
The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 in formula (Ac-2) includes a hydrocarbon group, -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH-, -S- and 2 of these Groups in which more than one species are combined are included. Hydrocarbon groups include aliphatic hydrocarbon groups and aromatic hydrocarbon groups. The number of carbon atoms in the aliphatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 1-30, more preferably 1-20, even more preferably 1-15. The aliphatic hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The number of carbon atoms in the aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 6-30, more preferably 6-20, even more preferably 6-10. The hydrocarbon group may have a substituent. A hydroxy group etc. are mentioned as a substituent. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12 is preferably a group represented by formula (L12-1), more preferably a group represented by formula (L12-2).
 式(L12-1)中、L12bは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12bが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基または炭化水素基と-O-とを組み合わせた基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-1), L 12b represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac-2) with P10 is shown. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12b includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, and a hydrocarbon group or a group of a combination of a hydrocarbon group and —O— is preferred.
 式(L12-2)中、L12cは3価の連結基を表し、XはSを表し、*1は式(Ac-2)のL11との結合位置を表し、*2は式(Ac-2)のP10との結合位置を表す。L12cが表す3価の連結基としては、炭化水素基;炭化水素基と、-O-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-NH-および-S-から選ばれる少なくとも1種とを組み合わせた基などが挙げられ、炭化水素基であることが好ましい。 In formula (L12-2), L 12c represents a trivalent linking group, X 1 represents S, *1 represents the bonding position with L 11 of formula (Ac-2), *2 represents formula ( The binding position of Ac-2) with P10 is shown. The trivalent linking group represented by L 12c includes a hydrocarbon group; and at least one selected from -O-, -CO-, -COO-, -OCO-, -NH- and -S- and the like, preferably a hydrocarbon group.
 式(Ac-2)においてP10はポリマー鎖を表す。P10が表すポリマー鎖は、ポリ(メタ)アクリル繰り返し単位、ポリエーテル繰り返し単位、ポリエステル繰り返し単位およびポリオール繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1種の繰り返し単位を有することが好ましい。ポリマー鎖P10の重量平均分子量は500~20000が好ましい。下限は1000以上が好ましい。上限は10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。P10の重量平均分子量が上記範囲であれば組成物中における顔料の分散性が良好である。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂が式(Ac-2)で表される繰り返し単位を有する樹脂である場合は、この樹脂は分散剤として好ましく用いられる。 P 10 in formula (Ac-2) represents a polymer chain. The polymer chain represented by P10 preferably has at least one repeating unit selected from poly(meth)acrylic repeating units, polyether repeating units, polyester repeating units and polyol repeating units. The weight average molecular weight of the polymer chain P10 is preferably 500-20,000. The lower limit is preferably 1000 or more. The upper limit is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of P10 is within the above range, the dispersibility of the pigment in the composition is good. When the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group is a resin having repeating units represented by formula (Ac-2), this resin is preferably used as a dispersant.
 P10が表すポリマー鎖は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基や環状エーテル基を含んでいてもよい。 The polymer chain represented by P10 may contain an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group or a cyclic ether group.
 本発明の着色組成物は、分散剤としての樹脂を含有することが好ましい。分散剤としては、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)が挙げられる。ここで、酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)とは、酸基の量が塩基性基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、酸基の量が70モル%以上である樹脂が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)が有する酸基は、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、10~105mgKOH/gが好ましい。また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)としては、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%を超える樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミノ基が好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin as a dispersant. Dispersants include acidic dispersants (acidic resins) and basic dispersants (basic resins). Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is greater than the amount of basic groups. As the acidic dispersant (acidic resin), a resin having an acid group content of 70 mol % or more is preferable when the total amount of the acid group and the basic group is 100 mol %. The acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxy group. The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 10-105 mgKOH/g. Further, a basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is greater than the amount of acid groups. As the basic dispersant (basic resin), a resin containing more than 50 mol % of basic groups is preferable when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol %. The basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amino group.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、グラフト樹脂であることも好ましい。グラフト樹脂の詳細については、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0025~0094の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a graft resin. For details of the graft resin, reference can be made to paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP-A-2012-255128, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂(樹脂Ac)であることも好ましい。芳香族カルボキシ基を有する樹脂としては上述したものが挙げられる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having an aromatic carboxy group (resin Ac). Examples of the resin having an aromatic carboxyl group include those mentioned above.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に窒素原子を含むポリイミン系分散剤であることも好ましい。ポリイミン系分散剤としては、pKa14以下の官能基を有する部分構造を有する主鎖と、原子数40~10000の側鎖とを有し、かつ主鎖及び側鎖の少なくとも一方に塩基性窒素原子を有する樹脂が好ましい。塩基性窒素原子は、塩基性を呈する窒素原子であれば特に制限はない。ポリイミン系分散剤については、特開2009-203462号公報の段落番号0022~0097、特開2012-255128号公報の段落番号0102~0166の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a polyimine-based dispersant containing nitrogen atoms in at least one of its main chain and side chains. The polyimine-based dispersant has a main chain having a partial structure having a functional group with a pKa of 14 or less and a side chain having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and at least one of the main chain and the side chain has a basic nitrogen atom. A resin having The basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a nitrogen atom exhibiting basicity. Regarding the polyimine-based dispersant, paragraph numbers 0022 to 0097 of JP-A-2009-203462 and paragraph numbers 0102-0166 of JP-A-2012-255128 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. .
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、コア部に複数個のポリマー鎖が結合した構造の樹脂であることも好ましい。このような樹脂としては、例えば、デンドリマー(星型ポリマーを含む)が挙げられる。また、デンドリマーの具体例としては、特開2013-043962号公報の段落番号0196~0209に記載された高分子化合物C-1~C-31などが挙げられる。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin having a structure in which a plurality of polymer chains are bonded to the core. Such resins include, for example, dendrimers (including star polymers). Further, specific examples of dendrimers include polymer compounds C-1 to C-31 described in paragraphs 0196 to 0209 of JP-A-2013-043962.
 分散剤として用いる樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位を含む樹脂であることも好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する繰り返し単位の含有量は、樹脂の全繰り返し単位中10モル%以上であることが好ましく、10~80モル%であることがより好ましく、20~70モル%であることが更に好ましい。 The resin used as the dispersant is also preferably a resin containing a repeating unit having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in its side chain. The content of repeating units having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in the side chain is preferably 10 mol% or more, more preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 20 to 70, of the total repeating units of the resin. More preferably, it is mol %.
 また、分散剤として、特開2018-087939号公報に記載された樹脂、特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219~0221に記載されたブロック共重合体(EB-1)~(EB-9)、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載のポリエステル側鎖を有するポリエチレンイミン、国際公開第2019/125940号に記載のブロック共重合体、特開2020-066687号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、特開2020-066688号公報に記載のアクリルアミド構造単位を有するブロックポリマー、国際公開第2016/104803号に記載の分散剤などを用いることもできる。 In addition, as a dispersant, resins described in JP-A-2018-087939, block copolymers (EB-1) to (EB-9) described in paragraphs 0219 to 0221 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077, Polyethyleneimine having a polyester side chain described in International Publication No. 2016/104803, a block copolymer described in International Publication No. 2019/125940, a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066687 , a block polymer having an acrylamide structural unit described in JP-A-2020-066688, a dispersant described in WO 2016/104803, and the like can also be used.
 分散剤は、市販品としても入手可能であり、そのような具体例としては、ビックケミー・ジャパン社製のDISPERBYKシリーズ、日本ルーブリゾール社製のSOLSPERSEシリーズ、BASF社製のEfkaシリーズ、味の素ファインテクノ(株)製のアジスパーシリーズ等が挙げられる。また、特開2012-137564号公報の段落番号0129に記載された製品、特開2017-194662号公報の段落番号0235に記載された製品を分散剤として用いることもできる。 Dispersants are also available as commercial products, and specific examples thereof include DISPERBYK series manufactured by BYK-Chemie Japan, SOLSPERSE series manufactured by Lubrizol Japan, Efka series manufactured by BASF, and Ajinomoto Fine Techno ( Co., Ltd. Ajisper series and the like. In addition, the product described in paragraph number 0129 of JP-A-2012-137564 and the product described in paragraph number 0235 of JP-A-2017-194662 can also be used as a dispersant.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における樹脂の含有量は、1~60質量%であることが好ましい。下限は5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましく、15質量%以上が更に好ましく、20質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は50質量%以下が好ましく、40質量%以下がより好ましい。
 また、着色組成物の全固形分中における酸基を有する樹脂の含有量は、1~60質量%であることが好ましい。下限は5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましく、15質量%以上が更に好ましく、20質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は50質量%以下が好ましく、40質量%以下がより好ましい。
The content of the resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 60% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 15% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less.
Further, the content of the acid group-containing resin in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 60% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 5% by mass or more, more preferably 10% by mass or more, still more preferably 15% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 20% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less.
 分散剤の含有量は、顔料100質量部に対して10~100質量部であることが好ましい。下限は15質量部以上が好ましく、20質量部以上がより好ましい。上限は80質量部以下が好ましく、60質量部以下がより好ましい。
 本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。樹脂を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the dispersant is preferably 10 to 100 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the pigment. The lower limit is preferably 15 parts by mass or more, more preferably 20 parts by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 80 parts by mass or less, more preferably 60 parts by mass or less.
The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one resin, or may contain two or more resins. When two or more resins are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<溶剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は溶剤を含有する。溶剤としては、有機溶剤が挙げられる。溶剤の種類は、各成分の溶解性や組成物の塗布性を満足すれば基本的には特に制限はない。有機溶剤としては、エステル系溶剤、ケトン系溶剤、アルコール系溶剤、アミド系溶剤、エーテル系溶剤、炭化水素系溶剤などが挙げられる。これらの詳細については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0223を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、環状アルキル基が置換したエステル系溶剤、環状アルキル基が置換したケトン系溶剤も好ましく用いることもできる。有機溶剤の具体例としては、ポリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジクロロメタン、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、3-ペンタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、2-メチルシクロヘキサノン、3-メチルシクロヘキサノン、4-メチルシクロヘキサノン、シクロヘプタノン、シクロオクタノン、酢酸シクロヘキシル、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、3-ブトキシ-N,N-ジメチルプロパンアミド、プロピレングリコールジアセテート、3-メトキシブタノール、メチルエチルケトン、ガンマブチロラクトン、スルホラン、アニソール、1,4-ジアセトキシブタン、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセタート、二酢酸ブタン-1,3-ジイル、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセタート、ジアセトンアルコール(別名としてダイアセトンアルコール、4-ヒドロキシ-4-メチル-2-ペンタノン)、2-メトキシプロピルアセテート、2-メトキシ-1-プロパノール、イソプロピルアルコールなどが挙げられる。ただし有機溶剤としての芳香族炭化水素類(ベンゼン、トルエン、キシレン、エチルベンゼン等)は、環境面等の理由により低減したほうがよい場合がある(例えば、有機溶剤全量に対して、50質量ppm(parts per million)以下とすることもでき、10質量ppm以下とすることもでき、1質量ppm以下とすることもできる)。
<<Solvent>>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a solvent. An organic solvent is mentioned as a solvent. The type of solvent is basically not particularly limited as long as it satisfies the solubility of each component and the coatability of the composition. Organic solvents include ester-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, amide-based solvents, ether-based solvents, and hydrocarbon-based solvents. For these details, reference can be made to paragraph number 0223 of WO2015/166779, the content of which is incorporated herein. Ester-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups and ketone-based solvents substituted with cyclic alkyl groups can also be preferably used. Specific examples of organic solvents include polyethylene glycol monomethyl ether, dichloromethane, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, 2 -heptanone, 3-pentanone, 4-heptanone, cyclohexanone, 2-methylcyclohexanone, 3-methylcyclohexanone, 4-methylcyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cyclohexyl acetate, cyclopentanone, ethylcarbitol acetate, butylcarbylate tall acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, 3-butoxy-N,N-dimethylpropanamide, propylene glycol diacetate, 3-methoxybutanol, methyl ethyl ketone, gamma-butyrolactone, sulfolane, anisole, 1,4-diacetoxybutane, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, butane-1,3-diyl diacetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, diacetone alcohol (also known as diacetone alcohol, 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone), 2-methoxypropyl acetate, 2-methoxy-1-propanol, isopropyl alcohol and the like. However, aromatic hydrocarbons (benzene, toluene, xylene, ethylbenzene, etc.) as organic solvents may be better reduced for environmental reasons (e.g., 50 mass ppm (parts per million), 10 ppm by mass or less, or 1 ppm by mass or less).
 本発明においては、金属含有量の少ない有機溶剤を用いることが好ましく、有機溶剤の金属含有量は、例えば、10質量ppb(parts per billion)以下であることが好ましい。必要に応じて質量ppt(parts per trillion)レベルの有機溶剤を用いてもよく、そのような有機溶剤は,例えば、東洋合成社が提供している(化学工業日報、2015年11月13日)。 In the present invention, it is preferable to use an organic solvent with a low metal content, and the metal content of the organic solvent is preferably, for example, 10 mass ppb (parts per billion) or less. If necessary, an organic solvent at a mass ppt (parts per trillion) level may be used, and such an organic solvent is provided, for example, by Toyo Gosei Co., Ltd. (Chemical Daily, November 13, 2015). .
 有機溶剤から金属等の不純物を除去する方法としては、例えば、蒸留(分子蒸留や薄膜蒸留等)やフィルタを用いたろ過を挙げることができる。ろ過に用いるフィルタのフィルタ孔径としては、10μm以下が好ましく、5μm以下がより好ましく、3μm以下が更に好ましい。フィルタの材質は、ポリテトラフロロエチレン、ポリエチレンまたはナイロンが好ましい。 Examples of methods for removing impurities such as metals from organic solvents include distillation (molecular distillation, thin film distillation, etc.) and filtration using a filter. The filter pore size of the filter used for filtration is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 5 μm or less, and even more preferably 3 μm or less. The material of the filter is preferably polytetrafluoroethylene, polyethylene or nylon.
 有機溶剤は、異性体(原子数が同じであるが構造が異なる化合物)が含まれていてもよい。また、異性体は、1種のみが含まれていてもよいし、複数種含まれていてもよい。 The organic solvent may contain isomers (compounds with the same number of atoms but different structures). Moreover, only one isomer may be contained, or a plurality of isomers may be contained.
 有機溶剤中の過酸化物の含有率が0.8mmol/L以下であることが好ましく、過酸化物を実質的に含まないことがより好ましい。 The content of peroxide in the organic solvent is preferably 0.8 mmol/L or less, and more preferably substantially free of peroxide.
 着色組成物中における溶剤の含有量は、10~95質量%であることが好ましく、20~90質量%であることがより好ましく、30~90質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the solvent in the coloring composition is preferably 10-95% by mass, more preferably 20-90% by mass, and even more preferably 30-90% by mass.
 また、本発明の着色組成物は、環境規制の観点から環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないことが好ましい。なお、本発明において、環境規制物質を実質的に含有しないとは、着色組成物中における環境規制物質の含有量が50質量ppm以下であることを意味し、30質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、10質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましく、1質量ppm以下であることが特に好ましい。環境規制物質は、例えば、ベンゼン;トルエン、キシレン等のアルキルベンゼン類;クロロベンゼン等のハロゲン化ベンゼン類等が挙げられる。これらは、REACH(Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of CHemicals)規則、PRTR(Pollutant Release and Transfer Register)法、VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds)規制等のもとに環境規制物質として登録されており、使用量や取り扱い方法が厳しく規制されている。これらの化合物は、着色組成物に用いられる各成分などを製造する際に溶媒として用いられることがあり、残留溶媒として着色組成物中に混入することがある。人への安全性、環境への配慮の観点よりこれらの物質は可能な限り低減することが好ましい。環境規制物質を低減する方法としては、系中を加熱や減圧して環境規制物質の沸点以上にして系中から環境規制物質を留去して低減する方法が挙げられる。また、少量の環境規制物質を留去する場合においては、効率を上げる為に該当溶媒と同等の沸点を有する溶媒と共沸させることも有用である。また、ラジカル重合性を有する化合物を含有する場合、減圧留去中にラジカル重合反応が進行して分子間で架橋してしまうことを抑制するために重合禁止剤等を添加して減圧留去してもよい。これらの留去方法は、原料の段階、原料を反応させた生成物(例えば、重合した後の樹脂溶液や多官能モノマー溶液)の段階、またはこれらの化合物を混ぜて作製した着色組成物の段階などのいずれの段階でも可能である。 In addition, from the viewpoint of environmental regulations, it is preferable that the colored composition of the present invention does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances. In the present invention, "substantially free of environmentally regulated substances" means that the content of environmentally regulated substances in the colored composition is 50 ppm by mass or less, preferably 30 ppm by mass or less. , is more preferably 10 mass ppm or less, and particularly preferably 1 mass ppm or less. Environmental control substances include, for example, benzene; alkylbenzenes such as toluene and xylene; and halogenated benzenes such as chlorobenzene. These comply with environmental regulations such as the REACH (Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals) Regulations, the PRTR (Pollutant Release and Transfer Register) Law, and the VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) Regulations. It is registered as a substance, and the amount used and handling methods are strictly regulated. These compounds may be used as a solvent when producing each component used in the coloring composition, and may be mixed into the coloring composition as a residual solvent. From the viewpoint of safety to humans and consideration for the environment, it is preferable to reduce these substances as much as possible. As a method for reducing the amount of environmentally regulated substances, there is a method in which the system is heated or decompressed to raise the temperature to the boiling point of the environmentally regulated substances or higher, and the environmentally regulated substances are distilled off from the system. In the case of distilling off a small amount of environmentally regulated substances, it is also useful to azeotrope with a solvent having a boiling point equivalent to that of the solvent in order to increase the efficiency. In addition, when a compound having radical polymerizability is contained, a polymerization inhibitor or the like is added and distilled off under reduced pressure in order to suppress the radical polymerization reaction from progressing during the vacuum distillation and the intermolecular cross-linking. may These distillation methods are the raw material stage, the reaction product of the raw materials (for example, the resin solution or polyfunctional monomer solution after polymerization), or the colored composition stage produced by mixing these compounds. It is possible at any stage such as
<<重合性化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。重合性化合物としては、ラジカル、酸または熱により架橋可能な公知の化合物を用いることができる。重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を有する化合物であることが好ましい。エチレン性不飽和結合含有基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。本発明で用いられる重合性化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であることが好ましい。
<<polymerizable compound>>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerizable compound. As the polymerizable compound, known compounds that can be crosslinked by radicals, acids or heat can be used. The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group. Examples of ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups include vinyl groups, (meth)allyl groups, and (meth)acryloyl groups. The polymerizable compound used in the present invention is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
 重合性化合物としては、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマーなどの化学的形態のいずれであってもよいが、モノマーが好ましい。重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下がより好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、150以上がより好ましく、250以上が更に好ましい。 The polymerizable compound may be in any chemical form such as monomer, prepolymer, oligomer, etc., but monomer is preferred. The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100-3000. The upper limit is more preferably 2000 or less, and even more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 150 or more, even more preferably 250 or more.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3個以上含む化合物であることが好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~15個含む化合物であることがより好ましく、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を3~6個含む化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。重合性化合物の具体例としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~0108、特開2013-029760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257、特開2013-253224号公報の段落番号0034~0038、特開2012-208494号公報の段落番号0477、特開2017-048367号公報、特許第6057891号公報、特許第6031807号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing 3 or more ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, more preferably a compound containing 3 to 15 ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing groups, an ethylenically unsaturated bond Compounds containing 3 to 6 containing groups are more preferred. The polymerizable compound is preferably a 3- to 15-functional (meth)acrylate compound, more preferably a 3- to 6-functional (meth)acrylate compound. Specific examples of the polymerizable compound include paragraph numbers 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705, paragraph 0227 of JP-A-2013-029760, paragraph numbers 0254-0257 of JP-A-2008-292970, and JP-A-2008-292970. 2013-253224, paragraphs 0034 to 0038, JP 2012-208494, paragraph 0477, JP 2017-048367, JP 6057891, the compound described in JP 6031807 , the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 重合性化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬(株)製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬(株)製、NKエステルA-DPH-12E;新中村化学工業(株)製)、およびこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコールおよび/またはプロピレングリコール残基を介して結合している構造の化合物(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。また、重合性化合物としては、ジグリセリンEO(エチレンオキシド)変性(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはM-460;東亞合成製)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製、NKエステルA-TMMT)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(日本化薬(株)製、KAYARAD HDDA)、RP-1040(日本化薬(株)製)、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、NKオリゴUA-7200(新中村化学工業(株)製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬(株)製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600、LINC-202UA(共栄社化学(株)製)、8UH-1006、8UH-1012(以上、大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、ライトアクリレートPOB-A0(共栄社化学(株)製)などを用いることもできる。 As the polymerizable compound, dipentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-330; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetra(meth)acrylate (commercially available as KAYARAD D-320 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD D-310; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate (as a commercial product, KAYARAD DPHA; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., NK Ester A-DPH-12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), and their (meth)acryloyl groups via ethylene glycol and/or propylene glycol residues Compounds of conjugated structures (eg SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartomer) are preferred. Further, as the polymerizable compound, diglycerin EO (ethylene oxide) modified (meth) acrylate (commercially available M-460; manufactured by Toagosei), pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., NK Ester A -TMMT), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., KAYARAD HDDA), RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) , NK Oligo UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600, LINC-202UA (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), 8UH-1006, 8UH-1012 (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), light acrylate POB-A0 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), etc. are used. can also
 重合性化合物には、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンプロピレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸エチレンオキシ変性トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートなどの3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物を用いることもできる。3官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-309、M-310、M-321、M-350、M-360、M-313、M-315、M-306、M-305、M-303、M-452、M-450(東亞合成(株)製)、NKエステル A9300、A-GLY-9E、A-GLY-20E、A-TMM-3、A-TMM-3L、A-TMM-3LM-N、A-TMPT、TMPT(新中村化学工業(株)製)、KAYARAD GPO-303、TMPTA、THE-330、TPA-330、PET-30(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Polymerizable compounds include trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane propyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, isocyanuric acid ethyleneoxy-modified tri(meth)acrylate, Trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate can also be used. Commercial products of trifunctional (meth)acrylate compounds include Aronix M-309, M-310, M-321, M-350, M-360, M-313, M-315, M-306 and M-305. , M-303, M-452, M-450 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), NK Ester A9300, A-GLY-9E, A-GLY-20E, A-TMM-3, A-TMM-3L, A -TMM-3LM-N, A-TMPT, TMPT (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD GPO-303, TMPTA, THE-330, TPA-330, PET-30 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) etc.
 重合性化合物には、酸基を有する化合物を用いることもできる。酸基を有する重合性化合物を用いることで、現像時に未露光部の重合性化合物が除去されやすく、現像残渣の発生を抑制できる。酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基等が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。酸基を有する重合性化合物としては、コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレートなどが挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、アロニックスM-510、M-520、アロニックスTO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)等が挙げられる。酸基を有する重合性化合物の好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、より好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像液に対する溶解性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。 A compound having an acid group can also be used as the polymerizable compound. By using a polymerizable compound having an acid group, the polymerizable compound in an unexposed area is easily removed during development, and generation of development residue can be suppressed. The acid group includes a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group and the like, and a carboxy group is preferred. Examples of the polymerizable compound having an acid group include succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol penta(meth)acrylate. Commercially available polymerizable compounds having an acid group include Aronix M-510, M-520 and Aronix TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.). The acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is preferably 0.1-40 mgKOH/g, more preferably 5-30 mgKOH/g. When the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH/g or more, the solubility in the developer is good, and when it is 40 mgKOH/g or less, it is advantageous in terms of production and handling.
 重合性化合物には、カプロラクトン構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120(以上、日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 A compound having a caprolactone structure can also be used as the polymerizable compound. Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a caprolactone structure include KAYARAD DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, and DPCA-120 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 重合性化合物には、アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物は、エチレンオキシ基および/またはプロピレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物がより好ましく、エチレンオキシ基を4~20個有する3~6官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物がさらに好ましい。アルキレンオキシ基を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えば、サートマー社製のエチレンオキシ基を4個有する4官能(メタ)アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬(株)製のイソブチレンオキシ基を3個有する3官能(メタ)アクリレートであるKAYARAD TPA-330などが挙げられる。 A polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group can also be used as the polymerizable compound. The polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group is preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group, and 3 to 4 having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups. A hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound is more preferred. Commercially available polymerizable compounds having an alkyleneoxy group include, for example, SR-494, a tetrafunctional (meth)acrylate having four ethyleneoxy groups manufactured by Sartomer Co., Ltd., and an isobutyleneoxy group manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. KAYARAD TPA-330, which is a trifunctional (meth)acrylate having three.
 重合性化合物には、フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン骨格を有する重合性化合物の市販品としては、オグソールEA-0200、EA-0300(大阪ガスケミカル(株)製、フルオレン骨格を有する(メタ)アクリレートモノマー)などが挙げられる。 A polymerizable compound having a fluorene skeleton can also be used as the polymerizable compound. Commercially available polymerizable compounds having a fluorene skeleton include Ogsol EA-0200 and EA-0300 (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemicals Co., Ltd., (meth)acrylate monomers having a fluorene skeleton).
 重合性化合物としては、トルエンなどの環境規制物質を実質的に含まない化合物を用いることも好ましい。このような化合物の市販品としては、KAYARAD DPHA LT、KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT(日本化薬(株)製)などが挙げられる。 As the polymerizable compound, it is also preferable to use a compound that does not substantially contain environmentally regulated substances such as toluene. Commercially available products of such compounds include KAYARAD DPHA LT and KAYARAD DPEA-12 LT (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
 着色組成物の全固形分中における重合性化合物の含有量は0.1~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1質量%以上であることがより好ましく、3質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、40質量%以下であることが好ましく、30質量%以下であることがより好ましく、25質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合性化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the polymerizable compound in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more, and even more preferably 3% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 40% by mass or less, more preferably 30% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerizable compound, or may contain two or more types. When two or more polymerizable compounds are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<光重合開始剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有する化合物が好ましい。光重合開始剤は、光ラジカル重合開始剤であることが好ましい。
<<Photoinitiator>>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, compounds having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet range to the visible range are preferred. The photopolymerization initiator is preferably a photoradical polymerization initiator.
 光重合開始剤としては、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物などが挙げられる。光重合開始剤は、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、ホスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物および3-アリール置換クマリン化合物であることが好ましく、オキシム化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、および、アシルホスフィン化合物から選ばれる化合物であることがより好ましく、オキシム化合物であることが更に好ましい。また、光重合開始剤としては、特開2014-130173号公報の段落0065~0111に記載された化合物、特許第6301489号公報に記載された化合物、MATERIAL STAGE 37~60p,vol.19,No.3,2019に記載されたパーオキサイド系光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/221177号に記載の光重合開始剤、国際公開第2018/110179号に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-043864号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-044030号公報に記載の光重合開始剤、特開2019-167313号公報に記載の過酸化物系開始剤、特開2020-055992号公報に記載のオキサゾリジン基を有するアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、特開2013-190459号公報に記載のオキシム系光重合開始剤、特開2020-172619号公報に記載の重合体、国際公開第2020/152120号に記載の式1で表される化合物などが挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Examples of photopolymerization initiators include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole compounds, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds and the like. From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, photopolymerization initiators include trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, hexaarylbi imidazole compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes, halomethyloxadiazole compounds and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds, oxime compounds, α-hydroxyketones compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds, more preferably oxime compounds. Further, as the photopolymerization initiator, compounds described in paragraphs 0065 to 0111 of JP-A-2014-130173, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6301489, MATERIAL STAGE 37-60p, vol. 19, No. 3, the peroxide photopolymerization initiator described in 2019, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/221177, the photopolymerization initiator described in International Publication No. 2018/110179, JP 2019-043864 The photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-044030, the photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2019-167313, the peroxide-based initiator described in JP-A-2020-055992. An aminoacetophenone-based initiator having an oxazolidine group described, an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator described in JP-A-2013-190459, a polymer described in JP-A-2020-172619, and International Publication No. 2020/152120. and the compounds of Formula 1 described, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール化合物の具体例としては、2,2’,4-トリス(2-クロロフェニル)-5-(3,4-ジメトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニル-1,1’-ビイミダゾールなどが挙げられる。 Specific examples of hexaarylbiimidazole compounds include 2,2′,4-tris(2-chlorophenyl)-5-(3,4-dimethoxyphenyl)-4,5-diphenyl-1,1′-biimidazole, etc. is mentioned.
 α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 184、Omnirad 1173、Omnirad 2959、Omnirad 127(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 184、Irgacure 1173、Irgacure 2959、Irgacure 127(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。α-アミノケトン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 907、Omnirad 369、Omnirad 369E、Omnirad 379EG(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 907、Irgacure 369、Irgacure 369E、Irgacure 379EG(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。アシルホスフィン化合物の市販品としては、Omnirad 819、Omnirad TPO(以上、IGM Resins B.V.社製)、Irgacure 819、Irgacure TPO(以上、BASF社製)などが挙げられる。 Commercially available α-hydroxyketone compounds include Omnirad 184, Omnirad 1173, Omnirad 2959, Omnirad 127 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 184, Irgacure 1173, Irgacure 2959, Irgacure 127 (above, BASF company) and the like. Commercially available α-aminoketone compounds include Omnirad 907, Omnirad 369, Omnirad 369E, Omnirad 379EG (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 907, Irgacure 369, Irgacure 369E, and Irgacure 3. 79EG (above, BASF made), etc. Commercially available acylphosphine compounds include Omnirad 819, Omnirad TPO (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Irgacure 819 and Irgacure TPO (manufactured by BASF).
 オキシム化合物としては、特開2001-233842号公報に記載の化合物、特開2000-080068号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.1653-1660)に記載の化合物、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年、pp.156-162)に記載の化合物、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年、pp.202-232)に記載の化合物、特開2000-066385号公報に記載の化合物、特表2004-534797号公報に記載の化合物、特開2006-342166号公報に記載の化合物、特開2017-019766号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6065596号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/152153号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/051680号に記載の化合物、特開2017-198865号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0038に記載の化合物、国際公開第2013/167515号に記載の化合物、特許第5430746号に記載の化合物、特許第5647738号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。オキシム化合物の具体例としては、3-ベンゾイルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロヘキシル-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-アセチルオキシム)などが挙げられる。市販品としては、Irgacure OXE01、Irgacure OXE02、Irgacure OXE03、Irgacure OXE04(以上、BASF社製)、TR-PBG-304、TR-PBG-327(トロンリー社製)、アデカオプトマーN-1919((株)ADEKA製、特開2012-014052号公報に記載の光重合開始剤2)が挙げられる。また、オキシム化合物としては、着色性が無い化合物や、透明性が高く変色し難い化合物を用いることも好ましい。市販品としては、アデカアークルズNCI-730、NCI-831、NCI-930(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of oxime compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A-2000-080068, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, J. Am. C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.1653-1660); C. S. Compounds described in Perkin II (1979, pp.156-162), compounds described in Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995, pp.202-232), compounds described in JP-A-2000-066385, Compounds described in JP-A-2004-534797, compounds described in JP-A-2006-342166, compounds described in JP-A-2017-019766, compounds described in Patent No. 6065596, International Publication No. 2015 / 152153, compounds described in WO 2017/051680, compounds described in JP 2017-198865, compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0038 of WO 2017/164127, Compounds described in International Publication No. 2013/167515, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5430746, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5647738, and the like. Specific examples of oxime compounds include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutane-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutane-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentane-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3-(4-toluenesulfonyloxy)iminobutan-2-one, 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino -1-phenylpropane-1-one, 1-[4-(phenylthio)phenyl]-3-cyclohexyl-propane-1,2-dione-2-(O-acetyloxime) and the like. Commercially available products include Irgacure OXE01, Irgacure OXE02, Irgacure OXE03, Irgacure OXE04 (manufactured by BASF), TR-PBG-304, TR-PBG-327 (manufactured by Tronly), and Adeka Optomer N-1919 (manufactured by Tronly). ) manufactured by ADEKA, photopolymerization initiator 2) described in JP-A-2012-014052. As the oxime compound, it is also preferable to use a compound having no coloring property or a compound having high transparency and resistance to discoloration. Commercially available products include ADEKA Arkles NCI-730, NCI-831 and NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).
 光重合開始剤としては、フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フルオレン環を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2014-137466号公報に記載の化合物、特許第6636081号公報に記載の化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2016-0109444号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A-2014-137466, compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6636081, and compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2016-0109444. mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール環の少なくとも1つのベンゼン環がナフタレン環となった骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。そのようなオキシム化合物の具体例としては、国際公開第2013/083505号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound having a skeleton in which at least one benzene ring of the carbazole ring is a naphthalene ring can also be used. Specific examples of such oxime compounds include compounds described in WO2013/083505.
 光重合開始剤としては、フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報に記載の化合物、特表2014-500852号公報に記載の化合物24、36~40、特開2013-164471号公報に記載の化合物(C-3)などが挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP-A-2010-262028, compounds 24, 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and JP-A-2013-164471. and the compound (C-3) of.
 光重合開始剤としては、ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物を用いることができる。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物は、二量体とすることも好ましい。ニトロ基を有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-114249号公報の段落番号0031~0047、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0008~0012、0070~0079に記載されている化合物、特許4223071号公報の段落番号0007~0025に記載されている化合物、アデカアークルズNCI-831((株)ADEKA製)が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as the photopolymerization initiator. The oxime compound having a nitro group is also preferably a dimer. Specific examples of the oxime compound having a nitro group include the compounds described in paragraph numbers 0031 to 0047 of JP-A-2013-114249 and paragraph numbers 0008-0012 and 0070-0079 of JP-A-2014-137466; Compounds described in paragraphs 0007 to 0025 of Japanese Patent No. 4223071 and ADEKA Arkles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) can be mentioned.
 光重合開始剤としては、ベンゾフラン骨格を有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/036910号に記載されているOE-01~OE-75が挙げられる。 An oxime compound having a benzofuran skeleton can also be used as the photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples include OE-01 to OE-75 described in WO 2015/036910.
 光重合開始剤としては、カルバゾール骨格にヒドロキシ基を有する置換基が結合したオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。このような光重合開始剤としては国際公開第2019/088055号に記載された化合物などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, an oxime compound in which a substituent having a hydroxyl group is bonded to the carbazole skeleton can also be used. Examples of such a photopolymerization initiator include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2019/088055.
 本発明において好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示すが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。 Specific examples of oxime compounds preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to these.
 オキシム化合物は、波長350~500nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物が好ましく、波長360~480nmの範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物がより好ましい。また、オキシム化合物の波長365nm又は波長405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、高いことが好ましく、1000~300000であることがより好ましく、2000~300000であることが更に好ましく、5000~200000であることが特に好ましい。化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。例えば、分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spectrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。 The oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 350 to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 360 to 480 nm. Further, the molar extinction coefficient of the oxime compound at a wavelength of 365 nm or a wavelength of 405 nm is preferably high from the viewpoint of sensitivity, more preferably 1000 to 300000, further preferably 2000 to 300000, even more preferably 5000 to 200000. It is particularly preferred to have The molar extinction coefficient of a compound can be measured using known methods. For example, it is preferably measured at a concentration of 0.01 g/L using an ethyl acetate solvent with a spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian).
 光重合開始剤としては、Irgacure OXE01(BASF社製)および/またはIrgacure OXE02(BASF社製)と、Omnirad 2959(IGM Resins B.V.社製)とを組み合わせて用いることも好ましい。 As the photopolymerization initiator, it is also preferable to use a combination of Irgacure OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and/or Irgacure OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) and Omnirad 2959 (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).
 光重合開始剤としては、2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いてもよい。そのような光ラジカル重合開始剤を用いることにより、光ラジカル重合開始剤の1分子から2つ以上のラジカルが発生するため、良好な感度が得られる。また、非対称構造の化合物を用いた場合においては、結晶性が低下して溶剤などへの溶解性が向上して、経時で析出しにくくなり、着色組成物の経時安定性を向上させることができる。2官能あるいは3官能以上の光ラジカル重合開始剤の具体例としては、特表2010-527339号公報、特表2011-524436号公報、国際公開第2015/004565号、特表2016-532675号公報の段落番号0407~0412、国際公開第2017/033680号の段落番号0039~0055に記載されているオキシム化合物の2量体、特表2013-522445号公報に記載されている化合物(E)および化合物(G)、国際公開第2016/034963号に記載されているCmpd1~7、特表2017-523465号公報の段落番号0007に記載されているオキシムエステル類光開始剤、特開2017-167399号公報の段落番号0020~0033に記載されている光開始剤、特開2017-151342号公報の段落番号0017~0026に記載されている光重合開始剤(A)、特許第6469669号公報に記載されているオキシムエステル光開始剤などが挙げられる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, a bifunctional or trifunctional or higher functional photoradical polymerization initiator may be used. By using such a radical photopolymerization initiator, two or more radicals are generated from one molecule of the radical photopolymerization initiator, so good sensitivity can be obtained. In addition, when a compound having an asymmetric structure is used, the crystallinity is reduced, the solubility in a solvent or the like is improved, the precipitation becomes difficult over time, and the stability over time of the colored composition can be improved. . Specific examples of bifunctional or trifunctional or higher photoradical polymerization initiators include Japanese Patent Publication No. 2010-527339, Japanese Patent Publication No. 2011-524436, International Publication No. 2015/004565, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-532675. Paragraph numbers 0407 to 0412, dimers of oxime compounds described in paragraph numbers 0039 to 0055 of International Publication No. 2017/033680, compound (E) and compounds described in JP-A-2013-522445 ( G), Cmpd1 to 7 described in International Publication No. 2016/034963, oxime ester photoinitiators described in paragraph number 0007 of JP 2017-523465, JP 2017-167399 Photoinitiators described in paragraph numbers 0020 to 0033, photoinitiators (A) described in paragraph numbers 0017 to 0026 of JP-A-2017-151342, described in Japanese Patent No. 6469669 and oxime ester photoinitiators.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における光重合開始剤の含有量は0.1~30質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、0.5質量%以上であることが好ましく、1質量%以上であることがより好ましい。上限は、20質量%以下であることが好ましく、15質量%以下であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、光重合開始剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。光重合開始剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more photopolymerization initiators are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
<<赤外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤を含有することができる。例えば、本発明の着色組成物を用いて赤外線透過フィルタを形成する場合においては、着色組成物中に赤外線吸収剤を含有させることで得られる膜について透過させる光の波長をより長波長側にシフトさせることができる。赤外線吸収剤は、極大吸収波長を波長700nmよりも長波長側に有する化合物であることが好ましい。赤外線吸収剤は波長700nmを超え1800nm以下の範囲に極大吸収波長を有する化合物であることが好ましい。また、赤外線吸収剤の波長500nmにおける吸光度Aと極大吸収波長における吸光度Aとの比率A/Aは、0.08以下であることが好ましく、0.04以下であることがより好ましい。
<<Infrared Absorber>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an infrared absorbing agent. For example, in the case of forming an infrared transmission filter using the coloring composition of the present invention, the wavelength of the light transmitted through the film obtained by containing an infrared absorbing agent in the coloring composition is shifted to the longer wavelength side. can be made The infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength on the longer wavelength side than the wavelength of 700 nm. The infrared absorbing agent is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more and 1800 nm or less. In addition, the ratio A 1 /A 2 between the absorbance A 1 at a wavelength of 500 nm and the absorbance A 2 at the maximum absorption wavelength of the infrared absorbent is preferably 0.08 or less, more preferably 0.04 or less. .
 赤外線吸収剤としては、ピロロピロール化合物、シアニン化合物、スクアリリウム化合物、フタロシアニン化合物、ナフタロシアニン化合物、クアテリレン化合物、メロシアニン化合物、クロコニウム化合物、オキソノール化合物、イミニウム化合物、ジチオール化合物、トリアリールメタン化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アゾメチン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ジベンゾフラノン化合物、ジチオレン金属錯体、金属酸化物、金属ホウ化物等が挙げられる。ピロロピロール化合物としては、特開2009-263614号公報の段落番号0016~0058に記載の化合物、特開2011-068731号公報の段落番号0037~0052に記載の化合物、国際公開第2015/166873号の段落番号0010~0033に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。スクアリリウム化合物としては、特開2011-208101号公報の段落番号0044~0049に記載の化合物、特許第6065169号公報の段落番号0060~0061に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/181987号の段落番号0040に記載の化合物、特開2015-176046号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/190162号の段落番号0072に記載の化合物、特開2016-074649号公報の段落番号0196~0228に記載の化合物、特開2017-067963号公報の段落番号0124に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/135359号に記載の化合物、特開2017-114956号公報に記載の化合物、特許6197940号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/120166号に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。シアニン化合物としては、特開2009-108267号公報の段落番号0044~0045に記載の化合物、特開2002-194040号公報の段落番号0026~0030に記載の化合物、特開2015-172004号公報に記載の化合物、特開2015-172102号公報に記載の化合物、特開2008-088426号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2016/190162号の段落番号0090に記載の化合物、特開2017-031394号公報に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。クロコニウム化合物としては、特開2017-082029号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。イミニウム化合物としては、例えば、特表2008-528706号公報に記載の化合物、特開2012-012399号公報に記載の化合物、特開2007-092060号公報に記載の化合物、国際公開第2018/043564号の段落番号0048~0063に記載の化合物が挙げられる。フタロシアニン化合物としては、特開2012-077153号公報の段落番号0093に記載の化合物、特開2006-343631号公報に記載のオキシチタニウムフタロシアニン、特開2013-195480号公報の段落番号0013~0029に記載の化合物、特許第6081771号公報に記載のバナジウムフタロシアニン化合物、国際公開第2020/071470号に記載の化合物、国際公開第2018/186489号の段落番号0020~0024、国際公開第2020/071470号の段落番号0029~0076に記載の化合物が挙げられる。ナフタロシアニン化合物としては、特開2012-077153号公報の段落番号0093に記載の化合物が挙げられる。ジチオレン金属錯体としては、特許第5733804号公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。金属酸化物としては、例えば、酸化インジウムスズ、酸化アンチモンスズ、酸化亜鉛、Alドープ酸化亜鉛、フッ素ドープ二酸化スズ、ニオブドープ二酸化チタン、酸化タングステンなどが挙げられる。酸化タングステンの詳細については、特開2016-006476号公報の段落番号0080を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。金属ホウ化物としては、ホウ化ランタンなどが挙げられる。ホウ化ランタンの市販品としては、LaB-F(日本新金属(株)製)などが挙げられる。また、金属ホウ化物としては、国際公開第2017/119394号に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。酸化インジウムスズの市販品としては、F-ITO(DOWAハイテック(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of infrared absorbers include pyrrolopyrrole compounds, cyanine compounds, squarylium compounds, phthalocyanine compounds, naphthalocyanine compounds, quaterrylene compounds, merocyanine compounds, croconium compounds, oxonol compounds, iminium compounds, dithiol compounds, triarylmethane compounds, pyrromethene compounds, and azomethine. compounds, anthraquinone compounds, dibenzofuranone compounds, dithiolene metal complexes, metal oxides, metal borides, and the like. As the pyrrolopyrrole compound, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0016 to 0058 of JP-A-2009-263614, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0037-0052 of JP-A-2011-068731, WO 2015/166873 Compounds described in Paragraph Nos. 0010 to 0033 and the like. Examples of the squarylium compound include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0044 to 0049 of JP-A-2011-208101, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0060 to 0061 of Japanese Patent No. 6065169, and paragraph number 0040 of WO 2016/181987. Compounds described in, compounds described in JP-A-2015-176046, compounds described in paragraph No. 0072 of WO 2016/190162, compounds described in paragraph Nos. 0196 to 0228 of JP-A-2016-074649 , the compound described in paragraph number 0124 of JP 2017-067963, the compound described in WO 2017/135359, the compound described in JP 2017-114956, the compound described in Patent 6197940, Examples include compounds described in International Publication No. 2016/120166. As the cyanine compound, compounds described in paragraphs 0044 to 0045 of JP-A-2009-108267, compounds described in paragraphs 0026-0030 of JP-A-2002-194040, and JP-A-2015-172004. The compound, the compound described in JP-A-2015-172102, the compound described in JP-A-2008-088426, the compound described in paragraph number 0090 of WO 2016/190162, JP-A-2017-031394 and the like compounds described in. Examples of croconium compounds include compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029. As the iminium compound, for example, compounds described in JP-A-2008-528706, compounds described in JP-A-2012-012399, compounds described in JP-A-2007-092060, International Publication No. 2018/043564 and the compounds described in paragraphs 0048 to 0063 of. Examples of the phthalocyanine compound include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153, oxytitanium phthalocyanine described in JP-A-2006-343631, and paragraph numbers 0013 to 0029 of JP-A-2013-195480. compounds, vanadium phthalocyanine compounds described in Patent No. 6081771, compounds described in WO 2020/071470, paragraphs 0020 to 0024 of WO 2018/186489, paragraphs of WO 2020/071470 Compounds described in Nos. 0029-0076 can be mentioned. Examples of naphthalocyanine compounds include compounds described in paragraph number 0093 of JP-A-2012-077153. Dithiolene metal complexes include compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5733804. Examples of metal oxides include indium tin oxide, antimony tin oxide, zinc oxide, Al-doped zinc oxide, fluorine-doped tin dioxide, niobium-doped titanium dioxide, and tungsten oxide. For details of tungsten oxide, paragraph 0080 of JP-A-2016-006476 can be referred to, the content of which is incorporated herein. Examples of metal borides include lanthanum boride. Commercially available lanthanum boride products include LaB 6 -F (manufactured by Nippon New Metal Co., Ltd.). Moreover, as a metal boride, the compound as described in international publication 2017/119394 can also be used. Commercially available products of indium tin oxide include F-ITO (manufactured by DOWA Hitech Co., Ltd.).
 また、赤外線吸収剤としては、特開2017-197437号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-025311号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2016/154782号に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第5884953号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第6036689号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特許第5810604号公報に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、国際公開第2017/213047号の段落番号0090~0107に記載のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2018-054760号公報の段落番号0019~0075に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-040955号公報の段落番号0078~0082に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-002773号公報の段落番号0043~0069に記載のピロール環含有化合物、特開2018-041047号公報の段落番号0024~0086に記載のアミドα位に芳香族環を有するスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-179131号公報に記載のアミド連結型スクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-141215号公報に記載のピロールビス型スクアリリウム骨格又はクロコニウム骨格を有する化合物、特開2017-082029号公報に記載されたジヒドロカルバゾールビス型のスクアリリウム化合物、特開2017-068120号公報の段落番号0027~0114に記載の非対称型の化合物、特開2017-067963号公報に記載されたピロール環含有化合物(カルバゾール型)、特許第6251530号公報に記載されたフタロシアニン化合物などを用いることもできる。 Further, as the infrared absorbing agent, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-197437, the squarylium compound described in JP-A-2017-025311, the squarylium compound described in WO 2016/154782, and the patent No. 5884953. No. 6036689, squarylium compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 5810604, squarylium compounds described in paragraphs 0090 to 0107 of International Publication No. 2017/213047, Pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in paragraphs 0019 to 0075 of JP 2018-054760, pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in paragraphs 0078 to 0082 of JP 2018-040955, paragraphs of JP 2018-002773 Pyrrole ring-containing compounds described in numbers 0043 to 0069, squarylium compounds having an aromatic ring at the amide α-position described in paragraph numbers 0024 to 0086 of JP-A-2018-041047, and those described in JP-A-2017-179131 Amide-linked squarylium compounds, compounds having a pyrrole-bis-type squarylium skeleton or croconium skeleton described in JP-A-2017-141215, dihydrocarbazole-bis-type squarylium compounds described in JP-A-2017-082029, JP-A-2017- Asymmetric compounds described in paragraph numbers 0027 to 0114 of 068120, pyrrole ring-containing compounds (carbazole type) described in JP-A-2017-067963, phthalocyanine compounds described in Japanese Patent No. 6251530, etc. can also be used.
 また、赤外線吸収剤として、欧州特許第3628645号明細書の段落番号0025に記載の下記式で表される酸化タングステンを用いることもできる。
 M (P(O)
 M、Mはアンモニウムカチオンまたは金属カチオンを表し、aは0.01~0.5であり、bは0~0.5であり、cは1であり、dは2.5~3であり、eは0.01~0.75であり、nは1、2または3であり、mは1、2または3であり、Rは、置換基を有していてもよい炭化水素基を表す。
Further, as an infrared absorbing agent, tungsten oxide represented by the following formula described in paragraph 0025 of EP 3628645 can also be used.
M 1 a M 2 b W c O d (P(O) n R m ) e
M 1 and M 2 represent an ammonium cation or a metal cation, a is 0.01 to 0.5, b is 0 to 0.5, c is 1, and d is 2.5 to 3. , e is 0.01 to 0.75, n is 1, 2 or 3, m is 1, 2 or 3, R is a hydrocarbon group optionally having a substituent represent.
 本発明の着色組成物が赤外線吸収剤を含有する場合、着色組成物の全固形分中における赤外線吸収剤の含有量は、1~40質量%であることが好ましい。下限は2質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、10質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、赤外線吸収剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。赤外線吸収剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains an infrared absorbing agent, the content of the infrared absorbing agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 1 to 40% by mass. The lower limit is preferably 2% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and even more preferably 10% by mass or more. The upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 25% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of infrared absorbing agent, or may contain two or more types thereof. When two or more kinds of infrared absorbing agents are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<環状エーテル基を有する化合物>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を含有することができる。環状エーテル基としては、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基などが挙げられる。環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、エポキシ基を有する化合物(以下、エポキシ化合物ともいう)であることが好ましい。
<<Compound Having a Cyclic Ether Group>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a compound having a cyclic ether group. Cyclic ether groups include epoxy groups and oxetanyl groups. The compound having a cyclic ether group is preferably a compound having an epoxy group (hereinafter also referred to as an epoxy compound).
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物は、低分子化合物(例えば分子量1000未満)でもよいし、高分子化合物(macromolecule)(例えば、分子量1000以上、ポリマーの場合は、重量平均分子量が1000以上)でもよい。環状エーテル基の重量平均分子量は、200~100000が好ましく、500~50000がより好ましい。重量平均分子量の上限は、10000以下が好ましく、5000以下がより好ましく、3000以下が更に好ましい。 A compound having a cyclic ether group may be a low-molecular compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 1000) or a macromolecule (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, and in the case of a polymer, a weight-average molecular weight of 1000 or more). The weight average molecular weight of the cyclic ether group is preferably from 200 to 100,000, more preferably from 500 to 50,000. The upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 10,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or less, and even more preferably 3,000 or less.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物としては、特開2013-011869号公報の段落番号0034~0036に記載された化合物、特開2014-043556号公報の段落番号0147~0156に記載された化合物、特開2014-089408号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載された化合物、特開2017-179172号公報に記載された化合物を用いることもできる。 As the compound having a cyclic ether group, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0036 of JP-A-2013-011869, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0147-0156 of JP-A-2014-043556, JP 2014 The compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of JP-A-089408 and the compounds described in JP-A-2017-179172 can also be used.
 エポキシ化合物としては、エポキシ樹脂を好ましく用いることができる。エポキシ樹脂としては、例えば、フェノール化合物のグリシジルエーテル化物であるエポキシ樹脂、各種ノボラック樹脂のグリシジルエーテル化物であるエポキシ樹脂、脂環式エポキシ樹脂、脂肪族系エポキシ樹脂、複素環式エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルエステル系エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルアミン系エポキシ樹脂、ハロゲン化フェノール類をグリシジル化したエポキシ樹脂、エポキシ基をもつケイ素化合物とそれ以外のケイ素化合物との縮合物、エポキシ基を持つ重合性不飽和化合物とそれ以外の他の重合性不飽和化合物との共重合体等が挙げられる。エポキシ樹脂のエポキシ当量は、310~3300g/eqであることが好ましく、310~1700g/eqであることがより好ましく、310~1000g/eqであることが更に好ましい。 Epoxy resin can be preferably used as the epoxy compound. Examples of epoxy resins include epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of phenolic compounds, epoxy resins that are glycidyl etherified compounds of various novolak resins, alicyclic epoxy resins, aliphatic epoxy resins, heterocyclic epoxy resins, glycidyl esters, epoxy resins, glycidylamine-based epoxy resins, epoxy resins obtained by glycidylating halogenated phenols, condensation products of silicon compounds with epoxy groups and other silicon compounds, polymerizable unsaturated compounds with epoxy groups and others and copolymers with other polymerizable unsaturated compounds. The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy resin is preferably 310 to 3300 g/eq, more preferably 310 to 1700 g/eq, even more preferably 310 to 1000 g/eq.
 環状エーテル基を有する化合物の市販品としては、例えば、EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製)、EPICLON N-695(DIC(株)製)、マープルーフG-0150M、G-0105SA、G-0130SP、G-0250SP、G-1005S、G-1005SA、G-1010S、G-2050M、G-01100、G-01758(以上、日油(株)製、エポキシ基含有ポリマー)等が挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available compounds having a cyclic ether group include EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation), EPICLON N-695 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Marproof G-0150M, G-0105SA, G-0130SP, G -0250SP, G-1005S, G-1005SA, G-1010S, G-2050M, G-01100, G-01758 (these are epoxy group-containing polymers manufactured by NOF Corporation) and the like.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における環状エーテル基を有する化合物の含有量は、0.1~20質量%が好ましい。下限は、例えば、0.5質量%以上が好ましく、1質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は、例えば、15質量%以下が好ましく、10質量%以下が更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、環状エーテル基を有する化合物を1種のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種以上含んでいてもよい。環状エーテル基を有する化合物を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the compound having a cyclic ether group in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass. The lower limit is, for example, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, more preferably 1% by mass or more. The upper limit is, for example, preferably 15% by mass or less, more preferably 10% by mass or less. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of compound having a cyclic ether group, or may contain two or more types. When two or more compounds having a cyclic ether group are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<硬化促進剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、硬化促進剤を含有することができる。硬化促進剤としては、チオール化合物、メチロール化合物、アミン化合物、ホスホニウム塩化合物、アミジン塩化合物、アミド化合物、塩基発生剤、イソシアネート化合物、アルコキシシラン化合物、オニウム塩化合物などが挙げられる。硬化促進剤の具体例としては、国際公開第2018/056189号の段落番号0094~0097に記載の化合物、特開2015-034963号公報の段落番号0246~0253に記載の化合物、特開2013-041165号公報の段落番号0186~0251に記載の化合物、特開2014-055114号公報に記載のイオン性化合物、特開2012-150180号公報の段落番号0071~0080に記載の化合物、特開2011-253054号公報に記載のエポキシ基を有するアルコキシシラン化合物、特許第5765059号公報の段落番号0085~0092に記載の化合物、特開2017-036379号公報に記載のカルボキシ基含有エポキシ硬化剤などが挙げられる。着色組成物の全固形分中における硬化促進剤の含有量は0.3~8.9質量%が好ましく、0.8~6.4質量%がより好ましい。
<<Curing accelerator>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a curing accelerator. Curing accelerators include thiol compounds, methylol compounds, amine compounds, phosphonium salt compounds, amidine salt compounds, amide compounds, base generators, isocyanate compounds, alkoxysilane compounds, onium salt compounds and the like. Specific examples of the curing accelerator include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0094 to 0097 of WO 2018/056189, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0246 to 0253 of JP 2015-034963, JP 2013-041165 Compounds described in paragraphs 0186 to 0251 of the publication, ionic compounds described in JP 2014-055114, compounds described in paragraphs 0071 to 0080 of JP 2012-150180, JP 2011-253054 Alkoxysilane compounds having an epoxy group described in JP-A-2005-200557, compounds described in paragraphs 0085 to 0092 of Japanese Patent No. 5765059, carboxy group-containing epoxy curing agents described in JP-A-2017-036379, and the like. The content of the curing accelerator in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, more preferably 0.8 to 6.4% by mass.
<<紫外線吸収剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有することができる。紫外線吸収剤としては、共役ジエン化合物、アミノジエン化合物、サリシレート化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、アクリロニトリル化合物、ヒドロキシフェニルトリアジン化合物、インドール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ジベンゾイル化合物などが挙げられる。このような化合物の具体例としては、特開2009-217221号公報の段落番号0038~0052、特開2012-208374号公報の段落番号0052~0072、特開2013-068814号公報の段落番号0317~0334、特開2016-162946号公報の段落番号0061~0080に記載された化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。紫外線吸収剤の具体例としては、下記構造の化合物などが挙げられる。紫外線吸収剤の市販品としては、例えば、UV-503(大東化学(株)製)、BASF社製のTinuvinシリーズ、Uvinul(ユビナール)シリーズ、住化ケムテックス(株)製のSumisorbシリーズなどが挙げられる。また、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、ミヨシ油脂製のMYUAシリーズ(化学工業日報、2016年2月1日)が挙げられる。また、紫外線吸収剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0049~0059に記載された化合物、国際公開第2016/181987号の段落番号0059~0076に記載された化合物、国際公開第2020/137819号に記載されたチオアリール基置換ベンゾトリアゾール型紫外線吸収剤を用いることもできる。
<<Ultraviolet absorber>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an ultraviolet absorber. Examples of ultraviolet absorbers include conjugated diene compounds, aminodiene compounds, salicylate compounds, benzophenone compounds, benzotriazole compounds, acrylonitrile compounds, hydroxyphenyltriazine compounds, indole compounds, triazine compounds, and dibenzoyl compounds. Specific examples of such compounds include paragraph numbers 0038 to 0052 of JP-A-2009-217221, paragraph numbers 0052-0072 of JP-A-2012-208374, paragraph numbers 0317-0317 of JP-A-2013-068814. 0334, and compounds described in paragraphs 0061 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-162946, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Specific examples of the ultraviolet absorber include compounds having the following structures. Examples of commercially available UV absorbers include UV-503 (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd.), Tinuvin series and Uvinul series manufactured by BASF, and Sumisorb series manufactured by Sumika Chemtex Co., Ltd. . Moreover, as a benzotriazole compound, the MYUA series made from Miyoshi oil and fats (Chemical Daily, February 1, 2016) is mentioned. In addition, the ultraviolet absorber is a compound described in paragraph numbers 0049 to 0059 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, a compound described in paragraph numbers 0059 to 0076 of WO 2016/181987, and WO 2020/137819. A thioaryl group-substituted benzotriazole-type ultraviolet absorber described in can also be used.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、0.01~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~5質量%がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は紫外線吸収剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。紫外線吸収剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the ultraviolet absorber in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of UV absorber, or may contain two or more types. When two or more ultraviolet absorbers are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<重合禁止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することができる。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-tert-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-tert-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)が挙げられる。中でも、p-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。着色組成物の全固形分中における重合禁止剤の含有量は、0.0001~5質量%が好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は重合禁止剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。重合禁止剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<polymerization inhibitor>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-tert-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis(3-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salts (ammonium salts, cerous salts, etc.). Among them, p-methoxyphenol is preferred. The content of the polymerization inhibitor in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.0001 to 5% by mass. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more polymerization inhibitors are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<シランカップリング剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。本明細書において、シランカップリング剤は、加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基とを有するシラン化合物を意味する。また、加水分解性基とは、ケイ素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び縮合反応の少なくともいずれかによってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基などが挙げられ、アルコキシ基が好ましい。すなわち、シランカップリング剤は、アルコキシシリル基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、加水分解性基以外の官能基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、メルカプト基、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、アミノ基、ウレイド基、スルフィド基、イソシアネート基、フェニル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基、(メタ)アクリロイル基およびエポキシ基が好ましい。シランカップリング剤の具体例としては、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピルトリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-502)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業(株)製、商品名 KBM-503)等がある。また、シランカップリング剤の具体例については、特開2009-288703号公報の段落番号0018~0036に記載の化合物、特開2009-242604号公報の段落番号0056~0066に記載の化合物が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。着色組成物の全固形分中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、0.01~15質量%であることが好ましく、0.05~10質量%であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物はシランカップリング剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。シランカップリング剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Silane coupling agent>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. As used herein, a silane coupling agent means a silane compound having a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups. Further, the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and capable of forming a siloxane bond by at least one of hydrolysis reaction and condensation reaction. Hydrolyzable groups include, for example, halogen atoms, alkoxy groups, acyloxy groups and the like, with alkoxy groups being preferred. That is, the silane coupling agent is preferably a compound having an alkoxysilyl group. Examples of functional groups other than hydrolyzable groups include vinyl group, (meth)allyl group, (meth)acryloyl group, mercapto group, epoxy group, oxetanyl group, amino group, ureido group, sulfide group and isocyanate group. , phenyl group, etc., and amino group, (meth)acryloyl group and epoxy group are preferred. Specific examples of the silane coupling agent include N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-602), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-amino propyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-603), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-602), γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-903), γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBE-903), 3-methacryloxy Propylmethyldimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-502), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-503), and the like. Further, specific examples of the silane coupling agent include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018 to 0036 of JP-A-2009-288703 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0056-0066 of JP-A-2009-242604. , the contents of which are incorporated herein. The content of the silane coupling agent in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 10% by mass. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more silane coupling agents are included, the total amount thereof preferably falls within the above range.
<<界面活性剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、界面活性剤を含有することができる。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン性界面活性剤、カチオン性界面活性剤、アニオン性界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用することができる。界面活性剤はシリコーン系界面活性剤またはフッ素系界面活性剤であることが好ましい。界面活性剤については、国際公開第2015/166779号の段落番号0238~0245に記載された界面活性剤を参照することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<<Surfactant>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a surfactant. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as fluorine-based surfactants, nonionic surfactants, cationic surfactants, anionic surfactants and silicone surfactants can be used. The surfactant is preferably a silicone-based surfactant or a fluorine-based surfactant. For surfactants, reference can be made to surfactants described in paragraphs 0238-0245 of WO2015/166779, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、特開2014-041318号公報の段落番号0060~0064(対応する国際公開第2014/017669号の段落番号0060~0064)等に記載の界面活性剤、特開2011-132503号公報の段落番号0117~0132に記載の界面活性剤、特開2020-008634号公報に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファックF-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、R-41、R-41-LM、RS-43、R-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント208G、215M、245F、601AD、601ADH2、602A、610FM、710FL、710FM、710FS、FTX-218(以上、(株)NEOS製)等が挙げられる。 As the fluorine-based surfactant, JP 2014-041318 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064 (corresponding International Publication No. 2014/017669 Paragraph Nos. 0060 to 0064) surfactants described in, JP 2011- Examples include surfactants described in paragraphs 0117 to 0132 of JP-A-132503 and surfactants described in JP-A-2020-008634, the contents of which are incorporated herein. Commercially available fluorosurfactants include Megafac F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, and F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F-558, F-559, F-560 , F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, R-41, R -41-LM, RS-43, R-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72-K, DS-21 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH- 40 (manufactured by AGC), PolyFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), Futergent 208G, 215M, 245F, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 610FM, 710FL, 710FM, 710 FS , FTX-218 (manufactured by NEOS Corporation) and the like.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファックDSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えば、メガファックDS-21が挙げられる。 The fluorosurfactant has a molecular structure with a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and an acrylic compound in which the functional group containing a fluorine atom is cleaved and the fluorine atom volatilizes when heat is applied is also suitable. Available. Examples of such fluorine-based surfactants include Megafac DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Mega Fac DS-21.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2016-216602号公報に記載されたフッ素系界面活性剤が挙げられ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 It is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound as the fluorosurfactant. Such fluorosurfactants include fluorosurfactants described in JP-A-2016-216602, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、ブロックポリマーを用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができる。また、特開2010-032698号公報の段落番号0016~0037に記載されたフッ素含有界面活性剤や、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3000~50000であり、例えば、14000である。上記の化合物中、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%はモル%である。
A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. The fluorosurfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth)acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups) (meta) A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used. In addition, the fluorine-containing surfactants described in paragraphs 0016 to 0037 of JP-A-2010-032698 and the following compounds are also exemplified as fluorine-based surfactants used in the present invention.
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3000-50000, for example 14000. In the above compounds, % indicating the ratio of repeating units is mol%.
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、エチレン性不飽和結合含有基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報の段落番号0050~0090および段落番号0289~0295に記載された化合物、DIC(株)製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。また、フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落番号0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。 A fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated bond-containing group in a side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. Specific examples include compounds described in paragraph numbers 0050 to 0090 and paragraph numbers 0289 to 0295 of JP-A-2010-164965, MEGAFACE RS-101, RS-102 and RS-718K manufactured by DIC Corporation, and RS-72-K. Further, as the fluorosurfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A-2015-117327 can also be used.
 また、国際公開第2020/084854号に記載の界面活性剤を、炭素数6以上のパーフルオロアルキル基を有する界面活性剤の代替として用いることも、環境規制の観点から好ましい。 It is also preferable from the viewpoint of environmental regulations to use the surfactant described in International Publication No. 2020/084854 as a substitute for the surfactant having a perfluoroalkyl group with 6 or more carbon atoms.
 また、式(fi-1)で表される含フッ素イミド塩化合物を界面活性剤として用いることも好ましい。
 式(fi-1)中、mは1または2を表し、nは1~4の整数を表し、aは1または2を表し、Xa+はa価の金属イオン、第1級アンモニウムイオン、第2級アンモニウムイオン、第3級アンモニウムイオン、第4級アンモニウムイオンまたはNH を表す。
It is also preferable to use a fluorine-containing imide salt compound represented by formula (fi-1) as a surfactant.
In the formula (fi-1), m represents 1 or 2, n represents an integer of 1 to 4, a represents 1 or 2, X a + is a valent metal ion, primary ammonium ion, Represents secondary ammonium ion, tertiary ammonium ion, quaternary ammonium ion or NH4 + .
 ノニオン性界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(BASF社製)、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1(BASF社製)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)、パイオニンD-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(日信化学工業(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and their ethoxylates and propoxylates (e.g., glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2 (BASF company), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (manufactured by BASF), Solsperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 (Fujifilm Wa Kojunyaku Co., Ltd.), Pionin D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (Takemoto Oil Co., Ltd.), Olfine E1010, Surfynol 104, 400, 440 (Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) ) and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、DOWSIL SH8400、SH8400 FLUID、FZ-2122、67 Additive、74 Additive、M Additive、SF 8419 OIL(以上、ダウ・東レ(株)製)、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP-341、KF-6000、KF-6001、KF-6002、KF-6003(以上、信越化学工業(株)製)、BYK-307、BYK-322、BYK-323、BYK-330、BYK-333、BYK-3760、BYK-UV3510(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Silicone surfactants include DOWSIL SH8400, SH8400 FLUID, FZ-2122, 67 Additive, 74 Additive, M Additive, SF 8419 OIL (manufactured by Dow Toray Industries, Inc.), TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP-341, KF-6000, KF-6001, KF-6002, KF-6003 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) , BYK-307, BYK-322, BYK-323, BYK-330, BYK-333, BYK-3760, BYK-UV3510 (manufactured by BYK-Chemie) and the like.
 また、シリコーン系界面活性剤には下記構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
A compound having the following structure can also be used as the silicone-based surfactant.
 着色組成物の全固形分中における界面活性剤の含有量は、0.001質量%~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~3.0質量%がより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は界面活性剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。界面活性剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 The content of the surfactant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.001% by mass to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005% by mass to 3.0% by mass. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one surfactant, or may contain two or more surfactants. When two or more surfactants are included, the total amount thereof is preferably within the above range.
<<酸化防止剤>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、酸化防止剤を含有することができる。酸化防止剤としては、フェノール化合物、亜リン酸エステル化合物、チオエーテル化合物などが挙げられる。フェノール化合物としては、フェノール系酸化防止剤として知られる任意のフェノール化合物を使用することができる。好ましいフェノール化合物としては、ヒンダードフェノール化合物が挙げられる。フェノール性ヒドロキシ基に隣接する部位(オルト位)に置換基を有する化合物が好ましい。前述の置換基としては炭素数1~22の置換又は無置換のアルキル基が好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、同一分子内にフェノール基と亜リン酸エステル基を有する化合物も好ましい。また、酸化防止剤は、リン系酸化防止剤も好適に使用することができる。リン系酸化防止剤としてはトリス[2-[[2,4,8,10-テトラキス(1,1-ジメチルエチル)ジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-6-イル]オキシ]エチル]アミン、トリス[2-[(4,6,9,11-テトラ-tert-ブチルジベンゾ[d,f][1,3,2]ジオキサホスフェピン-2-イル)オキシ]エチル]アミン、亜リン酸エチルビス(2,4-ジ-tert-ブチル-6-メチルフェニル)などが挙げられる。酸化防止剤の市販品としては、例えば、アデカスタブ AO-20、アデカスタブ AO-30、アデカスタブ AO-40、アデカスタブ AO-50、アデカスタブ AO-50F、アデカスタブ AO-60、アデカスタブ AO-60G、アデカスタブ AO-80、アデカスタブ AO-330(以上、(株)ADEKA製)などが挙げられる。また、酸化防止剤は、特許第6268967号公報の段落番号0023~0048に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/006600号に記載された化合物、国際公開第2017/164024号に記載された化合物、韓国公開特許第10-2019-0059371号公報に記載された化合物を使用することもできる。着色組成物の全固形分中における酸化防止剤の含有量は、0.01~20質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~15質量%であることがより好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は酸化防止剤を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。酸化防止剤を2種以上含む場合は、それらの合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
<<Antioxidant>>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain an antioxidant. Antioxidants include phenol compounds, phosphite ester compounds, thioether compounds and the like. Any phenolic compound known as a phenolic antioxidant can be used as the phenolic compound. Preferred phenolic compounds include hindered phenolic compounds. A compound having a substituent at a site adjacent to the phenolic hydroxy group (ortho position) is preferred. As the aforementioned substituent, a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms is preferred. The antioxidant is also preferably a compound having a phenol group and a phosphite ester group in the same molecule. Phosphorus-based antioxidants can also be suitably used as antioxidants. As a phosphorus antioxidant, tris[2-[[2,4,8,10-tetrakis(1,1-dimethylethyl)dibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-6 -yl]oxy]ethyl]amine, tris[2-[(4,6,9,11-tetra-tert-butyldibenzo[d,f][1,3,2]dioxaphosphepin-2-yl ) oxy]ethyl]amine, ethyl bis(2,4-di-tert-butyl-6-methylphenyl) phosphite, and the like. Examples of commercially available antioxidants include Adekastab AO-20, Adekastab AO-30, Adekastab AO-40, Adekastab AO-50, Adekastab AO-50F, Adekastab AO-60, Adekastab AO-60G, Adekastab AO-80. , ADEKA STAB AO-330 (manufactured by ADEKA Corporation) and the like. In addition, antioxidants are compounds described in paragraph numbers 0023 to 0048 of Japanese Patent No. 6268967, compounds described in WO 2017/006600, compounds described in WO 2017/164024, Compounds described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2019-0059371 can also be used. The content of the antioxidant in the total solid content of the coloring composition is preferably 0.01 to 20% by mass, more preferably 0.3 to 15% by mass. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one antioxidant, or may contain two or more antioxidants. When two or more kinds of antioxidants are included, it is preferable that the total amount thereof is within the above range.
<<その他成分>>
 本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、増感剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、連鎖移動剤など)を含有してもよい。これらの成分を適宜含有させることにより、膜物性などの性質を調整することができる。これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183以降(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の段落番号0237)の記載、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0104、0107~0109等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。また、本発明の着色組成物は、必要に応じて、潜在酸化防止剤を含有してもよい。潜在酸化防止剤としては、酸化防止剤として機能する部位が保護基で保護された化合物であって、100~250℃で加熱するか、又は酸/塩基触媒存在下で80~200℃で加熱することにより保護基が脱離して酸化防止剤として機能する化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤としては、国際公開第2014/021023号、国際公開第2017/030005号、特開2017-008219号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。潜在酸化防止剤の市販品としては、アデカアークルズGPA-5001((株)ADEKA製)等が挙げられる。
<<Other Ingredients>>
The coloring composition of the present invention may optionally contain sensitizers, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers and other auxiliaries (e.g., conductive particles, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, release accelerators, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.). Properties such as film physical properties can be adjusted by appropriately containing these components. These components are, for example, described in JP 2012-003225, paragraph number 0183 and later (corresponding US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812, paragraph number 0237), JP 2008-250074 paragraph The descriptions of numbers 0101 to 0104, 0107 to 0109, etc. can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein. Moreover, the coloring composition of this invention may contain a latent antioxidant as needed. The latent antioxidant is a compound in which the site functioning as an antioxidant is protected with a protecting group, and is heated at 100 to 250°C, or heated at 80 to 200°C in the presence of an acid/base catalyst. A compound that functions as an antioxidant by removing the protective group by the reaction is exemplified. Examples of latent antioxidants include compounds described in International Publication No. 2014/021023, International Publication No. 2017/030005, and JP-A-2017-008219. Commercially available latent antioxidants include ADEKA Arkles GPA-5001 (manufactured by ADEKA Co., Ltd.).
 本発明の着色組成物は、得られる膜の屈折率を調整するために金属酸化物を含有させてもよい。金属酸化物としては、TiO、ZrO、Al、SiO等が挙げられる。金属酸化物の一次粒子径は1~100nmが好ましく、3~70nmがより好ましく、5~50nmが更に好ましい。金属酸化物はコア-シェル構造を有していてもよい。また、この場合、コア部は中空状であってもよい。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a metal oxide in order to adjust the refractive index of the resulting film. Examples of metal oxides include TiO 2 , ZrO 2 , Al 2 O 3 and SiO 2 . The primary particle size of the metal oxide is preferably 1 to 100 nm, more preferably 3 to 70 nm, even more preferably 5 to 50 nm. Metal oxides may have a core-shell structure. Moreover, in this case, the core portion may be hollow.
 本発明の着色組成物は、耐光性改良剤を含んでもよい。耐光性改良剤としては、特開2017-198787号公報の段落番号0036~0037に記載の化合物、特開2017-146350号公報の段落番号0029~0034に記載の化合物、特開2017-129774号公報の段落番号0036~0037、0049~0052に記載の化合物、特開2017-129674号公報の段落番号0031~0034、0058~0059に記載の化合物、特開2017-122803号公報の段落番号0036~0037、0051~0054に記載の化合物、国際公開第2017/164127号の段落番号0025~0039に記載の化合物、特開2017-186546号公報の段落番号0034~0047に記載の化合物、特開2015-025116号公報の段落番号0019~0041に記載の化合物、特開2012-145604号公報の段落番号0101~0125に記載の化合物、特開2012-103475号公報の段落番号0018~0021に記載の化合物、特開2011-257591号公報の段落番号0015~0018に記載の化合物、特開2011-191483号公報の段落番号0017~0021に記載の化合物、特開2011-145668号公報の段落番号0108~0116に記載の化合物、特開2011-253174号公報の段落番号0103~0153に記載の化合物などが挙げられる。 The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a light resistance improver. As the light resistance improver, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 of JP-A-2017-198787, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0029-0034 of JP-A-2017-146350, JP-A-2017-129774 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037, 0049 to 0052 of JP 2017-129674 JP 2017-129674 paragraph numbers 0031 to 0034, 0058 to 0059 compounds described in JP 2017-122803 paragraph numbers 0036 to 0037 , compounds described in 0051 to 0054, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0025 to 0039 of WO 2017/164127, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0034 to 0047 of JP 2017-186546, JP 2015-025116 Compounds described in paragraph numbers 0019 to 0041 of JP-A-2012-145604, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0101-0125 of JP-A-2012-103475, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0018-0021 of JP-A-2012-103475, in particular Compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0018 of JP 2011-257591, compounds described in paragraphs 0017 to 0021 of JP 2011-191483, described in paragraphs 0108 to 0116 of JP 2011-145668 and compounds described in paragraph numbers 0103 to 0153 of JP-A-2011-253174.
 本発明の着色組成物は、テレフタル酸エステルを実質的に含まないことも好ましい。ここで、「実質的に含まない」とは、テレフタル酸エステルの含有量が、着色組成物の全量中、1000質量ppb以下であることを意味し、100質量ppb以下であることがより好ましく、ゼロであることが特に好ましい。 The coloring composition of the present invention preferably does not substantially contain terephthalic acid ester. Here, "substantially free" means that the content of terephthalic acid ester is 1000 mass ppb or less in the total amount of the coloring composition, and more preferably 100 mass ppb or less, Zero is particularly preferred.
 環境規制の観点から、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用が規制されることがある。本発明の着色組成物において、上記した化合物の含有率を小さくする場合、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸)及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸(特にパーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数が6~8のパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸)及びその塩の含有率は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01ppb~1,000ppbの範囲であることが好ましく、0.05ppb~500ppbの範囲であることがより好ましく、0.1ppb~300ppbの範囲であることが更に好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まなくてもよい。例えば、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の代替となりうる化合物を用いることで、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を実質的に含まない着色組成物を選択してもよい。規制化合物の代替となりうる化合物としては、例えば、パーフルオロアルキル基の炭素数の違いによって規制対象から除外された化合物が挙げられる。ただし、上記した内容は、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩の使用を妨げるものではない。本発明の着色組成物は、許容される最大の範囲内で、パーフルオロアルキルスルホン酸及びその塩、並びにパーフルオロアルキルカルボン酸及びその塩を含んでもよい。 From the perspective of environmental regulations, the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts may be regulated. In the coloring composition of the present invention, when the content of the above compounds is reduced, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid (especially perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and salts thereof, and per The content of fluoroalkylcarboxylic acid (especially perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid having 6 to 8 carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group) and its salt is 0.01ppb to 1,000ppb with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. is preferably in the range of , more preferably in the range of 0.05 ppb to 500 ppb, even more preferably in the range of 0.1 ppb to 300 ppb. The coloring composition of the present invention may be substantially free of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts. For example, by using a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and a compound that can substitute for perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salt, perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salt, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and salts thereof may be selected. Compounds that can substitute for the regulated compounds include, for example, compounds excluded from the regulation due to the difference in the number of carbon atoms in the perfluoroalkyl group. However, the above contents do not prevent the use of perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts, and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain perfluoroalkylsulfonic acid and its salts and perfluoroalkylcarboxylic acid and its salts within the maximum allowable range.
 本発明の着色組成物の含水率は、通常3質量%以下であり、0.01~1.5質量%が好ましく、0.1~1.0質量%の範囲であることがより好ましい。含水率は、カールフィッシャー法にて測定することができる。 The water content of the coloring composition of the present invention is usually 3% by mass or less, preferably 0.01 to 1.5% by mass, more preferably 0.1 to 1.0% by mass. The water content can be measured by the Karl Fischer method.
 本発明の着色組成物は、膜面状(平坦性など)の調整、膜厚の調整などを目的として粘度を調整して用いることができる。粘度の値は必要に応じて適宜選択することができるが、例えば、25℃において0.3mPa・s~50mPa・sが好ましく、0.5mPa・s~20mPa・sがより好ましい。粘度の測定方法としては、例えば、コーンプレートタイプの粘度計を使用し、25℃に温度調整を施した状態で測定することができる。 The coloring composition of the present invention can be used by adjusting the viscosity for the purpose of adjusting the film surface state (flatness, etc.) and adjusting the film thickness. The viscosity value can be appropriately selected as necessary, and is preferably, for example, 0.3 mPa·s to 50 mPa·s, more preferably 0.5 mPa·s to 20 mPa·s at 25°C. As a method for measuring the viscosity, for example, a cone-plate type viscometer can be used, and the viscosity can be measured in a state where the temperature is adjusted to 25°C.
<<収容容器>>
 着色組成物の収容容器としては、特に限定はなく、公知の収容容器を用いることができる。また、収容容器として、原材料や着色組成物中への不純物混入を抑制することを目的に、容器内壁を6種6層の樹脂で構成する多層ボトルや6種の樹脂を7層構造にしたボトルを使用することも好ましい。このような容器としては例えば特開2015-123351号公報に記載の容器が挙げられる。また、容器内壁は、容器内壁からの金属溶出を防ぎ、着色組成物の経時安定性を高めたり、成分変質を抑制するなど目的で、ガラス製やステンレス製などにすることも好ましい。
<<Container>>
The storage container for the coloring composition is not particularly limited, and known storage containers can be used. In addition, as a storage container, a multi-layer bottle whose inner wall is composed of 6 types and 6 layers of resins and a bottle with a 7-layer structure of 6 types of resins for the purpose of suppressing contamination of raw materials and coloring compositions. It is also preferred to use Examples of such a container include the container described in JP-A-2015-123351. In addition, the inner wall of the container is preferably made of glass or stainless steel for the purpose of preventing metal elution from the inner wall of the container, enhancing the stability of the coloring composition over time, and suppressing deterioration of components.
<着色組成物の調製方法>
 本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。着色組成物の調製に際しては、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解および/または分散して着色組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じて、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して着色組成物を調製してもよい。
<Method for preparing coloring composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned ingredients. In preparing the coloring composition, all components may be simultaneously dissolved and / or dispersed in a solvent to prepare a coloring composition, and if necessary, each component may be appropriately mixed as two or more solutions or dispersions. , these may be mixed at the time of use (at the time of coating) to prepare a colored composition.
 また、着色組成物の調製に際して、顔料を分散させるプロセスを含むことが好ましい。顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいて、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断、キャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、ボールミル、ペイントシェーカー、マイクロフルイダイザー、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化、超音波分散などが挙げられる。またサンドミル(ビーズミル)における顔料の粉砕においては、径の小さいビーズを使用する、ビーズの充填率を大きくする事等により粉砕効率を高めた条件で処理することが好ましい。また、粉砕処理後にろ過、遠心分離などで粗粒子を除去することが好ましい。また、顔料を分散させるプロセスおよび分散機は、「分散技術大全、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」や「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」、特開2015-157893号公報の段落番号0022に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用出来る。また顔料を分散させるプロセスにおいては、ソルトミリング工程にて粒子の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器、処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号公報、特開2012-046629号公報の記載を参酌できる。分散に使用するビーズの素材としては、ジルコニア、メノウ、石英、チタニア、タングステンカーバイト、窒化ケイ素、アルミナ、ステンレス鋼およびガラスが挙げられる。また、ビーズには、モース硬度が2以上の無機化合物を使用することもできる。組成物中に上記ビーズが1~10000ppm含まれていてもよい。 In addition, it is preferable to include a process of dispersing the pigment when preparing the coloring composition. In the process of dispersing pigments, mechanical forces used for dispersing pigments include compression, squeezing, impact, shearing, cavitation, and the like. Specific examples of these processes include bead mills, sand mills, roll mills, ball mills, paint shakers, microfluidizers, high speed impellers, sand grinders, flow jet mixers, high pressure wet atomization, ultrasonic dispersion, and the like. In pulverizing the pigment in a sand mill (bead mill), it is preferable to use beads with a small diameter or to increase the filling rate of the beads so as to increase the pulverization efficiency. Moreover, it is preferable to remove coarse particles by filtration, centrifugation, or the like after the pulverization treatment. In addition, the process and dispersing machine for dispersing pigments are described in ``Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia, Information Organization Co., Ltd., July 15, 2005'' and ``Dispersion Technology Centered on Suspension (Solid/Liquid Dispersion System) and Industrial Applications'' The actual practice of comprehensive materials, published by Management Development Center Publishing Department, October 10, 1978", the process and dispersing machine described in paragraph number 0022 of JP-A-2015-157893 can be suitably used. In the process of dispersing the pigment, the particles may be made finer in the salt milling step. Materials, equipment, processing conditions, etc. used in the salt milling step can be referred to, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2015-194521 and 2012-046629. Bead materials used for dispersion include zirconia, agate, quartz, titania, tungsten carbide, silicon nitride, alumina, stainless steel and glass. An inorganic compound having a Mohs hardness of 2 or more can also be used for the beads. The composition may contain 1 to 10000 ppm of the beads.
 着色組成物の調製にあたり、異物の除去や欠陥の低減などの目的で、着色組成物をフィルタでろ過することが好ましい。フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているフィルタであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン(PTFE)、ポリフッ化ビニリデン(PVDF)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン(例えばナイロン-6、ナイロン-6,6)等のポリアミド樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量のポリオレフィン樹脂を含む)等の素材を用いたフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含む)及びナイロンが好ましい。 In preparing the colored composition, it is preferable to filter the colored composition with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances and reducing defects. As the filter, any filter that has been conventionally used for filtration or the like can be used without particular limitation. For example, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), fluororesins such as polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), polyamide resins such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyethylene, polyolefin resins such as polypropylene (PP) ( (including high-density, ultra-high-molecular-weight polyolefin resin). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) and nylon are preferred.
 フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μmが好ましく、0.01~3.0μmがより好ましく、0.05~0.5μmが更に好ましい。フィルタの孔径が上記範囲であれば、微細な異物をより確実に除去できる。フィルタの孔径値については、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。フィルタは、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NXEY、DFA4201NAEY、DFA4201J006Pなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)及び株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタを用いることができる。 The pore size of the filter is preferably 0.01-7.0 μm, more preferably 0.01-3.0 μm, and even more preferably 0.05-0.5 μm. If the pore diameter of the filter is within the above range, fine foreign matter can be removed more reliably. For the pore size value of the filter, reference can be made to the filter manufacturer's nominal value. Various filters provided by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, DFA4201NAEY, DFA4201J006P, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Nihon Entegris Co., Ltd. (former Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.), Kitz Micro Filter Co., Ltd., etc. can be used as filters. .
 また、フィルタとしてファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましい。ファイバ状のろ材としては、例えば、ポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられる。市販品としては、ロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)が挙げられる。フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタ(例えば、第1のフィルタと第2のフィルタなど)を組み合わせてもよい。その際、各フィルタでのろ過は、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。また、第1のフィルタでのろ過は、分散液のみに対して行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタでろ過を行ってもよい。また着色組成物の親疎水性に合わせて、適宜フィルタを選択することができる。 It is also preferable to use a fiber-like filter medium as the filter. Examples of fiber-like filter media include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, and glass fiber. Commercially available products include SBP type series (SBP008, etc.), TPR type series (TPR002, TPR005, etc.), and SHPX type series (SHPX003, etc.) manufactured by Roki Techno. When using filters, different filters (eg, a first filter and a second filter, etc.) may be combined. At that time, filtration with each filter may be performed only once, or may be performed twice or more. Also, filters with different pore sizes within the range described above may be combined. Alternatively, the filtration with the first filter may be performed only on the dispersion liquid, and after mixing other components, the filtration with the second filter may be performed. In addition, the filter can be appropriately selected according to the hydrophilicity/hydrophobicity of the coloring composition.
<膜>
 本発明の膜は、上述した本発明の着色組成物から得られる膜である。本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタや赤外線透過フィルタなどの光学フィルタに用いることができる。
<Membrane>
The film of the present invention is a film obtained from the colored composition of the present invention described above. The film of the present invention can be used in optical filters such as color filters and infrared transmission filters.
 本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。例えば、膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 The film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. For example, the film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
 本発明の膜をカラーフィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜は、緑色、赤色、青色、シアン色、マゼンタ色または黄色の色相を有することが好ましく、緑色、赤色または黄色の色相を有することがより好ましい。また、本発明の膜は、カラーフィルタの着色画素として好ましく用いることができる。着色画素としては、赤色画素、緑色画素、青色画素、マゼンタ色画素、シアン色画素、黄色画素などが挙げられ、赤色画素、緑色画素および黄色画素であることが好ましく、赤色画素または緑色画素であることがより好ましく、緑色画素であることが更に好ましい。 When the film of the present invention is used as a color filter, the film of the present invention preferably has a hue of green, red, blue, cyan, magenta or yellow, and more preferably has a hue of green, red or yellow. preferable. Moreover, the film of the present invention can be preferably used as a colored pixel of a color filter. Examples of colored pixels include red pixels, green pixels, blue pixels, magenta pixels, cyan pixels, and yellow pixels. Red pixels, green pixels, and yellow pixels are preferred, and red pixels or green pixels are preferred. is more preferable, and green pixels are even more preferable.
 また、本発明の膜は、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが更に好ましい。なかでも、光透過率が50%となる波長が、470~520nmの波長範囲と、575~625nmの波長範囲のそれぞれに存在することが好ましい。この態様において、光透過率が50%となる短波長側の波長は、475~520nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、480~520nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。また、光透過率が50%となる長波長側の波長は、580~620nmの波長範囲に存在することが好ましく、585~615nmの波長範囲に存在することがより好ましい。このような分光特性を有する膜は、緑色画素として好ましく用いられる。 In the film of the present invention, the wavelength at which the light transmittance is 50% is preferably in the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, and more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. It is even more preferred to be present in the wavelength range. In particular, it is preferable that the wavelengths at which the light transmittance is 50% exist in both the wavelength range of 470 to 520 nm and the wavelength range of 575 to 625 nm. In this embodiment, the wavelength on the short wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 475 to 520 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 480 to 520 nm. Further, the wavelength on the long wavelength side at which the light transmittance is 50% preferably exists in the wavelength range of 580 to 620 nm, more preferably in the wavelength range of 585 to 615 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics is preferably used as a green pixel.
 本発明の膜を赤外線透過フィルタとして用いる場合、本発明の膜は、例えば、以下の(1)~(4)のいずれかの分光特性を有することが好ましい。
 (1):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~640nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長800~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~640nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長700nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (2):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~750nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長900~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~750nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長850nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (3):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~830nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長1000~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~830nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長940nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
 (4):膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長400~950nmの範囲における最大値が20%以下(好ましくは15%以下、より好ましくは10%以下)で、膜の厚み方向における光透過率の、波長1100~1300nmの範囲における最小値が70%以上(好ましくは75%以上、より好ましくは80%以上)である膜。このような分光特性を有する膜は、波長400~950nmの範囲の光を遮光して、波長1040nmを超える光を透過させることができる。
When the film of the present invention is used as an infrared transmission filter, the film of the present invention preferably has, for example, any one of the following spectral characteristics (1) to (4).
(1): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film. The minimum value of the ratio in the wavelength range of 800 to 1300 nm is 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more). A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 640 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 700 nm or more.
(2): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film. A film having a minimum modulus of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 900 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 750 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 850 nm or more.
(3): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and the light transmission in the thickness direction of the film. A film having a minimum modulus of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1000 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 830 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 940 nm or more.
(4): The maximum value of the light transmittance in the thickness direction of the film in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm is 20% or less (preferably 15% or less, more preferably 10% or less), and light transmission in the film thickness direction. A film having a minimum modulus of 70% or more (preferably 75% or more, more preferably 80% or more) in the wavelength range of 1100 to 1300 nm. A film having such spectral characteristics can block light in the wavelength range of 400 to 950 nm and transmit light in the wavelength range of 1040 nm or more.
<膜の製造方法>
 次に、本発明の膜の製造方法について説明する。本発明の膜は、本発明の着色組成物を塗布する工程を経て製造できる。膜の製造方法においては、更にパターン(画素)を形成する工程を含むことが好ましい。パターン(画素)の形成方法としては、フォトリソグラフィ法、ドライエッチング法が挙げられ、フォトリソグラフィ法が好ましい。
<Method for producing membrane>
Next, the method for producing the film of the present invention will be described. The film of the present invention can be produced through the step of applying the coloring composition of the present invention. Preferably, the film manufacturing method further includes a step of forming a pattern (pixels). A method for forming the pattern (pixels) includes a photolithography method and a dry etching method, and the photolithography method is preferable.
 フォトリソグラフィ法によるパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する工程と、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する工程と、を含むことが好ましい。必要に応じて、着色組成物層をベークする工程(プリベーク工程)、および、現像されたパターン(画素)をベークする工程(ポストベーク工程)を設けてもよい。 Pattern formation by photolithography includes the steps of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, a step of patternwise exposing the colored composition layer, and a step of exposing the colored composition layer. forming a pattern (pixels) by developing and removing the exposed portion. If necessary, a step of baking the coloring composition layer (pre-baking step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (pixels) (post-baking step) may be provided.
 着色組成物層を形成する工程では、本発明の着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。支持体としては、特に限定は無く、用途に応じて適宜選択できる。例えば、ガラス基板、シリコン基板などが挙げられ、シリコン基板であることが好ましい。また、シリコン基板には、電荷結合素子(CCD)、相補型金属酸化膜半導体(CMOS)、透明導電膜などが形成されていてもよい。また、シリコン基板には、各画素を隔離するブラックマトリクスが形成されている場合もある。また、シリコン基板には、上部の層との密着性改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下地層が設けられていてもよい。下地層の表面接触角は、ジヨードメタンで測定した際に20~70°であることが好ましい。また、水で測定した際に30~80°であることが好ましい。 In the step of forming the colored composition layer, the colored composition layer of the present invention is used to form the colored composition layer on the support. The support is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected depending on the application. Examples thereof include glass substrates and silicon substrates, and silicon substrates are preferred. Also, a charge-coupled device (CCD), a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), a transparent conductive film, or the like may be formed on the silicon substrate. In some cases, the silicon substrate is formed with a black matrix that isolates each pixel. In addition, the silicon substrate may be provided with an underlying layer for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface. The surface contact angle of the underlayer is preferably 20 to 70° when measured with diiodomethane. Further, it is preferably 30 to 80° when measured with water.
 着色組成物の塗布方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、滴下法(ドロップキャスト);スリットコート法;スプレー法;ロールコート法;回転塗布法(スピンコーティング);流延塗布法;スリットアンドスピン法;プリウェット法(例えば、特開2009-145395号公報に記載されている方法);インクジェット(例えば、オンデマンド方式、ピエゾ方式、サーマル方式)、ノズルジェット等の吐出系印刷、フレキソ印刷、スクリーン印刷、グラビア印刷、反転オフセット印刷、メタルマスク印刷などの各種印刷法;金型等を用いた転写法;ナノインプリント法などが挙げられる。インクジェットでの適用方法としては、特に限定されず、例えば「広がる・使えるインクジェット-特許に見る無限の可能性-、2005年2月発行、住ベテクノリサーチ」に示された方法(特に115ページ~133ページ)や、特開2003-262716号公報、特開2003-185831号公報、特開2003-261827号公報、特開2012-126830号公報、特開2006-169325号公報などに記載の方法が挙げられる。また、着色組成物の塗布方法については、国際公開第2017/030174号、国際公開第2017/018419号の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 A known method can be used as a method for applying the coloring composition. For example, dropping method (drop cast); slit coating method; spray method; roll coating method; spin coating method (spin coating); methods described in publications); inkjet (e.g., on-demand method, piezo method, thermal method), ejection system printing such as nozzle jet, flexographic printing, screen printing, gravure printing, reverse offset printing, metal mask printing, etc. Examples include various printing methods; transfer methods using molds and the like; nanoimprinting methods and the like. The application method for inkjet is not particularly limited. 133 page), and methods described in JP-A-2003-262716, JP-A-2003-185831, JP-A-2003-261827, JP-A-2012-126830, JP-A-2006-169325, etc. mentioned. In addition, regarding the method of applying the coloring composition, the descriptions of WO 2017/030174 and WO 2017/018419 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 支持体上に形成した着色組成物層は、乾燥(プリベーク)してもよい。低温プロセスにより膜を製造する場合は、プリベークを行わなくてもよい。プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク時間は、10~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。プリベークは、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (pre-baked). Pre-baking may not be performed when the film is manufactured by a low-temperature process. When pre-baking is performed, the pre-baking temperature is preferably 150° C. or lower, more preferably 120° C. or lower, and even more preferably 110° C. or lower. The lower limit can be, for example, 50° C. or higher, and can also be 80° C. or higher. The pre-bake time is preferably 10 to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Pre-baking can be performed using a hot plate, an oven, or the like.
 次に、着色組成物層をパターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー露光機やスキャナ露光機などを用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン状に露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。 Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure step). For example, the colored composition layer can be exposed in a pattern by exposing through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using a stepper exposure machine, a scanner exposure machine, or the like. Thereby, the exposed portion can be cured.
 露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等が挙げられる。また、波長300nm以下の光(好ましくは波長180~300nmの光)を用いることもできる。波長300nm以下の光としては、KrF線(波長248nm)、ArF線(波長193nm)などが挙げられ、KrF線(波長248nm)が好ましい。また、300nm以上の長波な光源も利用できる。 Radiation (light) that can be used for exposure includes g-line, i-line, and the like. Light with a wavelength of 300 nm or less (preferably light with a wavelength of 180 to 300 nm) can also be used. Light having a wavelength of 300 nm or less includes KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm), ArF rays (wavelength: 193 nm), etc., and KrF rays (wavelength: 248 nm) are preferable. A long-wave light source of 300 nm or more can also be used.
 また、露光に際して、光を連続的に照射して露光してもよく、パルス的に照射して露光(パルス露光)してもよい。なお、パルス露光とは、短時間(例えば、ミリ秒レベル以下)のサイクルで光の照射と休止を繰り返して露光する方式の露光方法のことである。 In addition, when exposing, the light may be continuously irradiated and exposed, or may be irradiated and exposed in pulses (pulse exposure). Note that the pulse exposure is an exposure method in which light irradiation and pause are repeated in a cycle of short time (for example, less than millisecond level).
 照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cmが好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cmがより好ましい。露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば、酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、または、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、または、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m~100000W/m(例えば、5000W/m、15000W/m、または、35000W/m)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/mなどとすることができる。 The dose (exposure dose) is, for example, preferably 0.03 to 2.5 J/cm 2 , more preferably 0.05 to 1.0 J/cm 2 . The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be selected as appropriate. The exposure may be in an oxygen-free atmosphere, or in a high-oxygen atmosphere with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, or 50% by volume). In addition, the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and is usually selected from the range of 1000 W/m 2 to 100000 W/m 2 (eg, 5000 W/m 2 , 15000 W/m 2 or 35000 W/m 2 ). can be done. The oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may be appropriately combined. For example, the illuminance may be 10000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10% by volume and 20000 W/m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 35% by volume.
 次に、着色組成物層の未露光部を現像除去してパターン(画素)を形成する。着色組成物層の未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 Next, the unexposed areas of the colored composition layer are removed by development to form a pattern (pixels). The development and removal of the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer can be performed using a developer. As a result, the unexposed portion of the colored composition layer in the exposure step is eluted into the developer, leaving only the photocured portion. The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Further, in order to improve the residue removability, the step of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and then supplying new developer may be repeated several times.
 現像液は、有機溶剤、アルカリ現像液などが挙げられ、アルカリ現像液が好ましく用いられる。アルカリ現像液としては、アルカリ剤を純水で希釈したアルカリ性水溶液(アルカリ現像液)が好ましい。アルカリ剤としては、例えば、アンモニア、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、ジグリコールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、ヒドロキシアミン、エチレンジアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、エチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、ジメチルビス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)アンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物や、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。アルカリ剤は、分子量が大きい化合物の方が環境面および安全面で好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液のアルカリ剤の濃度は、0.001~10質量%が好ましく、0.01~1質量%がより好ましい。また、現像液は、さらに界面活性剤を含有していてもよい。現像液は、移送や保管の便宜などの観点より、一旦濃縮液として製造し、使用時に必要な濃度に希釈してもよい。希釈倍率は特に限定されないが、例えば1.5~100倍の範囲に設定することができる。また、現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することも好ましい。また、リンスは、現像後の着色組成物層が形成された支持体を回転させつつ、現像後の着色組成物層へリンス液を供給して行うことが好ましい。また、リンス液を吐出させるノズルを支持体の中心部から支持体の周縁部に移動させて行うことも好ましい。この際、ノズルの支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させるにあたり、ノズルの移動速度を徐々に低下させながら移動させてもよい。このようにしてリンスを行うことで、リンスの面内ばらつきを抑制できる。また、ノズルを支持体中心部から周縁部へ移動させつつ、支持体の回転速度を徐々に低下させても同様の効果が得られる。 The developer includes an organic solvent, an alkaline developer, etc., and an alkaline developer is preferably used. As the alkaline developer, an alkaline aqueous solution (alkali developer) obtained by diluting an alkaline agent with pure water is preferable. Examples of alkaline agents include ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, diglycolamine, diethanolamine, hydroxylamine, ethylenediamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, and tetrabutylammonium hydroxide. , ethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide, dimethylbis(2-hydroxyethyl)ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecene, etc. Examples include organic alkaline compounds and inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate and sodium metasilicate. A compound having a large molecular weight is preferable for the alkaline agent from the standpoint of environment and safety. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. Moreover, the developer may further contain a surfactant. From the viewpoint of transportation and storage convenience, the developer may be produced once as a concentrated solution and then diluted to the required concentration when used. Although the dilution ratio is not particularly limited, it can be set, for example, in the range of 1.5 to 100 times. It is also preferable to wash (rinse) with pure water after development. Rinsing is preferably carried out by supplying a rinsing solution to the developed colored composition layer while rotating the support on which the developed colored composition layer is formed. It is also preferable to move the nozzle for discharging the rinsing liquid from the central portion of the support to the peripheral portion of the support. At this time, when moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the periphery, the moving speed of the nozzle may be gradually decreased. By performing rinsing in this manner, in-plane variations in rinsing can be suppressed. A similar effect can be obtained by gradually decreasing the rotation speed of the support while moving the nozzle from the center of the support to the periphery.
 現像後、乾燥を施した後に追加露光処理や加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行うことが好ましい。追加露光処理やポストベークは、硬化を完全なものとするための現像後の硬化処理である。ポストベークにおける加熱温度は、例えば、100~240℃が好ましく、200~240℃がより好ましい。ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。追加露光処理を行う場合、露光に用いられる光は、波長400nm以下の光であることが好ましい。また、追加露光処理は、韓国公開特許第10-2017-0122130号公報に記載された方法で行ってもよい。 After development, it is preferable to perform additional exposure processing and heat processing (post-baking) after drying. Additional exposure processing and post-baking are post-development curing treatments for complete curing. The heating temperature in post-baking is, for example, preferably 100 to 240.degree. C., more preferably 200 to 240.degree. Post-baking can be performed continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulating dryer), or a high-frequency heater so that the developed film satisfies the above conditions. . When the additional exposure process is performed, the light used for exposure preferably has a wavelength of 400 nm or less. Further, the additional exposure process may be performed by the method described in Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2017-0122130.
 ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成し、この着色組成物層の全体を硬化させて硬化物層を形成する工程と、この硬化物層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、フォトレジスト層をパターン状に露光したのち、現像してレジストパターンを形成する工程と、このレジストパターンをマスクとして硬化物層に対してエッチングガスを用いてドライエッチングする工程と、を含むことが好ましい。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、更にプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジスト層の形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成については、特開2013-064993号公報の段落番号0010~0067の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Pattern formation by a dry etching method is a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and curing the entire colored composition layer to form a cured product layer; a step of forming a photoresist layer on the cured layer; a step of patternwise exposing the photoresist layer and then developing it to form a resist pattern; and etching the cured layer using the resist pattern as a mask. and dry etching using a gas. In forming the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-baking process. In particular, as the formation process of the photoresist layer, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment (post-baking treatment) after development are performed is desirable. Regarding pattern formation by a dry etching method, descriptions in paragraphs 0010 to 0067 of JP-A-2013-064993 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
<光学フィルタ>
 本発明の光学フィルタは、上述した本発明の膜を有する。光学フィルタの種類としては、カラーフィルタおよび赤外線透過フィルタなどが挙げられ、カラーフィルタであることが好ましい。カラーフィルタは、その着色画素として本発明の膜を有することが好ましい。
<Optical filter>
The optical filter of the present invention has the film of the present invention as described above. Types of optical filters include color filters and infrared transmission filters, and color filters are preferred. A color filter preferably has the film of the present invention as its colored pixels.
 光学フィルタにおいて本発明の膜の膜厚は、目的に応じて適宜調整できる。膜厚は、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、5μm以下がさらに好ましい。膜厚の下限は、0.1μm以上が好ましく、0.2μm以上がより好ましく、0.3μm以上がさらに好ましい。 In the optical filter, the film thickness of the film of the present invention can be appropriately adjusted according to the purpose. The film thickness is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 10 μm or less, even more preferably 5 μm or less. The lower limit of the film thickness is preferably 0.1 μm or more, more preferably 0.2 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or more.
 光学フィルタに含まれる画素の幅は0.4~10.0μmであることが好ましい。下限は、0.4μm以上であることが好ましく、0.5μm以上であることがより好ましく、0.6μm以上であることが更に好ましい。上限は、5.0μm以下であることが好ましく、2.0μm以下であることがより好ましく、1.0μm以下であることが更に好ましく、0.8μm以下であることがより一層好ましい。また、画素のヤング率は0.5~20GPaであることが好ましく、2.5~15GPaがより好ましい。 The width of pixels included in the optical filter is preferably 0.4 to 10.0 μm. The lower limit is preferably 0.4 μm or more, more preferably 0.5 μm or more, and even more preferably 0.6 μm or more. The upper limit is preferably 5.0 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, even more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.8 μm or less. Also, the Young's modulus of the pixel is preferably 0.5 to 20 GPa, more preferably 2.5 to 15 GPa.
 光学フィルタに含まれる各画素は高い平坦性を有することが好ましい。具体的には、画素の表面粗さRaは、100nm以下であることが好ましく、40nm以下であることがより好ましく、15nm以下であることが更に好ましい。下限は規定されないが、例えば0.1nm以上であることが好ましい。画素の表面粗さは、例えばVeeco社製のAFM(原子間力顕微鏡) Dimension3100を用いて測定することができる。また、画素上の水の接触角は適宜好ましい値に設定することができるが、典型的には、50~110°の範囲である。接触角は、例えば接触角計CV-DT・A型(協和界面科学(株)製)を用いて測定できる。また、画素の体積抵抗値は高いことが好ましい。具体的には、画素の体積抵抗値は10Ω・cm以上であることが好ましく、1011Ω・cm以上であることがより好ましい。上限は規定されないが、例えば1014Ω・cm以下であることが好ましい。画素の体積抵抗値は、超高抵抗計5410(アドバンテスト社製)を用いて測定することができる。 Each pixel included in the optical filter preferably has high flatness. Specifically, the pixel surface roughness Ra is preferably 100 nm or less, more preferably 40 nm or less, and even more preferably 15 nm or less. Although the lower limit is not specified, it is preferably 0.1 nm or more, for example. The surface roughness of a pixel can be measured using, for example, AFM (Atomic Force Microscope) Dimension 3100 manufactured by Veeco. Also, the contact angle of water on the pixel can be appropriately set to a preferable value, but is typically in the range of 50 to 110°. The contact angle can be measured using, for example, a contact angle meter CV-DT-A type (manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd.). Moreover, it is preferable that the volume resistance value of the pixel is high. Specifically, the volume resistance value of the pixel is preferably 10 9 Ω·cm or more, more preferably 10 11 Ω·cm or more. Although the upper limit is not specified, it is preferably 10 14 Ω·cm or less, for example. The volume resistance value of the pixel can be measured using an ultra-high resistance meter 5410 (manufactured by Advantest).
 光学フィルタにおいては、本発明の膜の表面に保護層が設けられていてもよい。保護層を設けることで、酸素遮断化、低反射化、親疎水化、特定波長の光(紫外線、近赤外線等)の遮蔽等の種々の機能を付与することができる。保護層の厚さとしては、0.01~10μmが好ましく、0.1~5μmがより好ましい。保護層の形成方法としては、保護層形成用の組成物を塗布して形成する方法、化学気相蒸着法、成型した樹脂を接着材で貼りつける方法等が挙げられる。保護層を構成する成分としては、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、エン・チオール樹脂、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリエーテル樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、ポリスルホン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリフェニレン樹脂、ポリアリーレンエーテルホスフィンオキシド樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリアミドイミド樹脂、ポリオレフィン樹脂、環状オレフィン樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、ポリオール樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、アラミド樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、アルキド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、変性シリコーン樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリアクリロニトリル樹脂、セルロース樹脂、Si、C、W、Al、Mo、SiO、Siなどが挙げられ、これらの成分を二種以上含有しても良い。例えば、酸素遮断化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層はポリオール樹脂と、SiOと、Siを含むことが好ましい。また、低反射化を目的とした保護層の場合、保護層は(メタ)アクリル樹脂とフッ素樹脂を含むことが好ましい。 In the optical filter, a protective layer may be provided on the surface of the film of the present invention. By providing the protective layer, it is possible to impart various functions such as blocking oxygen, reducing reflection, making the film hydrophilic and hydrophobic, and blocking light of a specific wavelength (ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.). The thickness of the protective layer is preferably 0.01-10 μm, more preferably 0.1-5 μm. Examples of the method of forming the protective layer include a method of applying a protective layer-forming composition, a chemical vapor deposition method, and a method of adhering a molded resin with an adhesive. Components constituting the protective layer include (meth)acrylic resins, ene-thiol resins, polycarbonate resins, polyether resins, polyarylate resins, polysulfone resins, polyethersulfone resins, polyphenylene resins, polyarylene ether phosphine oxide resins, and polyimides. Resins, polyamideimide resins, polyolefin resins, cyclic olefin resins, polyester resins, styrene resins, polyol resins, polyvinylidene chloride resins, melamine resins, urethane resins, aramid resins, polyamide resins, alkyd resins, epoxy resins, modified silicone resins, fluorine Resins, polyacrylonitrile resins, cellulose resins, Si, C, W, Al 2 O 3 , Mo, SiO 2 , Si 2 N 4 and the like, and two or more of these components may be contained. For example, in the case of a protective layer intended to block oxygen, the protective layer preferably contains a polyol resin, SiO 2 and Si 2 N 4 . In the case of a protective layer intended to reduce reflection, the protective layer preferably contains a (meth)acrylic resin and a fluororesin.
 保護層は、必要に応じて、有機・無機微粒子、特定波長の光(例えば、紫外線、近赤外線等)の吸収剤、屈折率調整剤、酸化防止剤、密着剤、界面活性剤等の添加剤を含有しても良い。有機・無機微粒子の例としては、例えば、高分子微粒子(例えば、シリコーン樹脂微粒子、ポリスチレン微粒子、メラミン樹脂微粒子)、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、酸化ジルコニウム、酸化インジウム、酸化アルミニウム、窒化チタン、酸窒化チタン、フッ化マグネシウム、中空シリカ、シリカ、炭酸カルシウム、硫酸バリウム等が挙げられる。特定波長の光の吸収剤は公知の吸収剤を用いることができる。これらの添加剤の含有量は適宜調整できるが、保護層の全質量に対して0.1~70質量%が好ましく、1~60質量%がさらに好ましい。 If necessary, the protective layer contains organic/inorganic fine particles, absorbers for light of specific wavelengths (e.g., ultraviolet rays, near-infrared rays, etc.), refractive index modifiers, antioxidants, adhesion agents, additives such as surfactants. may contain. Examples of organic/inorganic fine particles include polymeric fine particles (eg, silicone resin fine particles, polystyrene fine particles, melamine resin fine particles), titanium oxide, zinc oxide, zirconium oxide, indium oxide, aluminum oxide, titanium nitride, and titanium oxynitride. , magnesium fluoride, hollow silica, silica, calcium carbonate, barium sulfate, and the like. A known absorber can be used as the absorber for light of a specific wavelength. The content of these additives can be appropriately adjusted, but is preferably 0.1 to 70% by mass, more preferably 1 to 60% by mass, based on the total mass of the protective layer.
 また、保護層としては、特開2017-151176号公報の段落番号0073~0092に記載の保護層を用いることもできる。 Further, as the protective layer, the protective layers described in paragraphs 0073 to 0092 of JP-A-2017-151176 can also be used.
 光学フィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。 The optical filter may have a structure in which each pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern.
<固体撮像素子>
 本発明の固体撮像素子は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。固体撮像素子の構成としては、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。
<Solid-state image sensor>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it functions as a solid-state imaging device.
 基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCD(電荷結合素子)イメージセンサ、CMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)イメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオードおよびポリシリコン等からなる転送電極を有し、フォトダイオードおよび転送電極上にフォトダイオードの受光部のみ開口した遮光膜を有し、遮光膜上に遮光膜全面およびフォトダイオード受光部を覆うように形成された窒化シリコン等からなるデバイス保護膜を有し、デバイス保護膜上に、カラーフィルタを有する構成である。更に、デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(基板に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各着色画素が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各着色画素よりも低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を有する撮像装置の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報、特開2014-179577号公報、国際公開第2018/043654号に記載の装置が挙げられる。また、特開2019-211559号公報の中で示しているように固体撮像素子の構造内に紫外線吸収層を設けて耐光性を改良してもよい。本発明の固体撮像素子を備えた撮像装置は、デジタルカメラや、撮像機能を有する電子機器(携帯電話等)の他、車載カメラや監視カメラ用としても用いることができる。 A plurality of photodiodes and transfer electrodes made of polysilicon or the like are provided on the substrate, forming the light-receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD (charge-coupled device) image sensor, CMOS (complementary metal-oxide semiconductor) image sensor, etc.). and a device protective film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light shielding film and the photodiode light receiving portion. and a color filter on the device protective film. Furthermore, a configuration having a condensing means (for example, a microlens or the like; the same shall apply hereinafter) on the device protective film and below the color filter (on the side close to the substrate), or a configuration having a condensing means on the color filter, etc. There may be. Moreover, the color filter may have a structure in which each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by partition walls, for example, in a grid pattern. In this case, the partition wall preferably has a lower refractive index than each color pixel. Examples of imaging devices having such a structure include devices described in JP-A-2012-227478, JP-A-2014-179577, and International Publication No. 2018/043654. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-211559, an ultraviolet absorption layer may be provided in the structure of the solid-state imaging device to improve light resistance. An imaging device equipped with the solid-state imaging device of the present invention can be used not only for digital cameras and electronic devices (mobile phones, etc.) having an imaging function, but also for vehicle-mounted cameras and monitoring cameras.
<画像表示装置>
 本発明の画像表示装置は、上述した本発明の膜を有する。画像表示装置としては、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などが挙げられる。画像表示装置の定義や各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木昭夫著、(株)工業調査会、1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田龍男編集、(株)工業調査会、1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。
<Image display device>
The image display device of the present invention has the film of the present invention described above. Examples of image display devices include liquid crystal display devices and organic electroluminescence display devices. For a definition of an image display device and details of each image display device, see, for example, "Electronic Display Device (by Akio Sasaki, Industrial Research Institute, 1990)", "Display Device (by Junsho Ibuki, Sangyo Tosho ( Co., Ltd.) issued in 1989). Liquid crystal display devices are described, for example, in "Next Generation Liquid Crystal Display Technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Choukai Co., Ltd., 1994)". There is no particular limitation on the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied.
 以下に実施例を挙げて本発明をさらに具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。従って、本発明の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。なお、以下に示す構造式中のMeはメチル基を表し、Etはエチル基を表し、Buはブチル基を表す。 The present invention will be described more specifically below with reference to examples. The materials, usage amounts, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Accordingly, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the specific examples shown below. In the structural formulas shown below, Me represents a methyl group, Et represents an ethyl group, and Bu represents a butyl group.
<分散液の製造>
 下記の表に記載の素材を混合した後、直径0.3mmのジルコニアビーズ230質量部を加えて、ペイントシェーカーを用いて5時間分散処理を行い、ビーズをろ過で分離して分散液を製造した。下記の表に記載の量を表す数値は質量部である。なお、以下において、混錬研磨処理の欄にて「あり」と記載されるものについては、以下の方法で混錬研磨処理を行った着色剤を用いた。また、下記表に各分散液の経時増粘率を記す。経時増粘率は以下の方法で測定した。
<Production of dispersion liquid>
After mixing the materials shown in the table below, 230 parts by mass of zirconia beads with a diameter of 0.3 mm were added, and dispersion treatment was performed using a paint shaker for 5 hours, and the beads were separated by filtration to produce a dispersion liquid. . The figures representing the amounts given in the table below are parts by weight. In addition, in the following, for those described as "Yes" in the column of kneading and polishing treatment, a coloring agent subjected to kneading and polishing treatment by the following method was used. In addition, the viscosity increase rate of each dispersion over time is shown in the table below. The time-dependent thickening rate was measured by the following method.
(混練研磨処理条件)
 顔料5.3質量部、摩砕剤74.7質量部および粘結剤14質量部をラボプラストミル((株)東洋精機製作所製)に添加し、装置中の混練物の温度が70℃になるように温度コントロールして、2時間混練した。顔料は、下記表に記載の顔料の欄に記載の素材を用いた。摩砕剤は中性無水芒硝E(平均粒子径(体積基準の50%径(D50))=20μm、三田尻化学製)を使用した。粘結剤はジエチレングリコールを使用した。混練研磨後の混練物を、24℃の水10Lで水洗処理して摩砕剤および粘結剤を取り除き、加熱オーブンで80℃24時間の処理を行った。
(Conditions for kneading and polishing treatment)
5.3 parts by mass of a pigment, 74.7 parts by mass of a grinding agent, and 14 parts by mass of a binder were added to Laboplastomill (manufactured by Toyo Seiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), and the temperature of the kneaded material in the device was raised to 70°C. The mixture was kneaded for 2 hours while controlling the temperature so that As the pigment, the material described in the column of pigment described in the table below was used. Neutral anhydrous mirabilite E (average particle diameter (50% volume-based diameter (D50)) = 20 µm, manufactured by Mitajiri Kagaku) was used as a grinding agent. Diethylene glycol was used as a binder. The kneaded material after kneading and polishing was washed with 10 L of water at 24° C. to remove the grinding agent and the binder, and was treated in a heating oven at 80° C. for 24 hours.
(経時増粘率の測定方法)
 得られた分散液を、45℃の温度で、7日間で加熱した。加熱前後の顔料分散液の粘度を測定し、加熱前の分散液の粘度と加熱後の分散液の粘度の差の絶対値を算出した。分散液の粘度は、粘度計(TV-22型粘度計、コーンプレートタイプ、東機産業(株)製)を用いて測定した。なお、分散液の粘度の測定は、顔料分散液の温度を25℃に温度調整して行った。下記式より、経時増粘率を算出し、以下の基準で経時増粘率を評価した。
 経時増粘率=|加熱前の分散液の粘度―加熱後の分散液の粘度|/加熱前の分散液の粘度×100
 A:経時増粘率が5%未満である
 B:経時増粘率が5%以上15%未満である
 C:経時増粘率が15%以上25%未満である
 D:経時増粘率が25%以上である
(Method for measuring thickening rate over time)
The resulting dispersion was heated at a temperature of 45° C. for 7 days. The viscosity of the pigment dispersion was measured before and after heating, and the absolute value of the difference between the viscosity of the dispersion before heating and the viscosity of the dispersion after heating was calculated. The viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured using a viscometer (TV-22 type viscometer, cone plate type, manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd.). The viscosity of the dispersion liquid was measured by adjusting the temperature of the pigment dispersion liquid to 25°C. The rate of increase in viscosity over time was calculated from the following formula, and the rate of increase in viscosity over time was evaluated according to the following criteria.
Time-dependent viscosity increase =|viscosity of dispersion before heating−viscosity of dispersion after heating|/viscosity of dispersion before heating×100
A: The rate of thickening over time is less than 5% B: The rate of thickening over time is 5% or more and less than 15% C: The rate of thickening over time is 15% or more and less than 25% D: The rate of thickening over time is 25 % or more
 上記表中の略語で示す素材の詳細は下記の通りである。 The details of the materials indicated by the abbreviations in the table above are as follows.
(顔料、顔料誘導体)
 PG36:C.I.ピグメントグリーン36(緑色顔料、フタロシアニン顔料)
 PG58:C.I.ピグメントグリーン58(緑色顔料、フタロシアニン顔料)
 PG63:C.I.ピグメントグリーン63(緑色顔料、フタロシアニン顔料)
 G1:下記構造の化合物
 PR122:C.I.ピグメントレッド122(赤色顔料、キナクリドン顔料)
 PR177:C.I.ピグメントレッド177(赤色顔料、アントラキノン顔料)
 PR224:C.I.ピグメントレッド224(赤色顔料、ペリレン顔料)
 PR254:C.I.ピグメントレッド254(赤色顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料)
 PR264:C.I.ピグメントレッド264(赤色顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料)
 PR272:C.I.ピグメントレッド272(赤色顔料、ジケトピロロピロール顔料)
 PY129:C.I.ピグメントイエロー129(黄色顔料、アゾメチン顔料)
 PY138:C.I.ピグメントイエロー138(黄色顔料、キノフタロン顔料)
 PY185:C.I.ピグメントイエロー185(黄色顔料、イソインドリン顔料)
 a-1:下記構造の化合物
 A-1~A-73:下記表に記載の金属原子に、下記表に記載の第1配位子(構造例(A-4)については第1配位子と第2配位子)が配位している構造例(A-1)~(A-73)の化合物。各化合物は、仏国特許出願公開第2013609号明細書に記載の手法で合成した。
(pigment, pigment derivative)
PG36: C.I. I. Pigment Green 36 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
PG58: C.I. I. Pigment Green 58 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
PG63: C.I. I. Pigment Green 63 (green pigment, phthalocyanine pigment)
G1: a compound having the following structure
PR122: C.I. I. Pigment Red 122 (red pigment, quinacridone pigment)
PR177: C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 (red pigment, anthraquinone pigment)
PR224: C.I. I. Pigment Red 224 (red pigment, perylene pigment)
PR254: C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment)
PR264: C.I. I. Pigment Red 264 (red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment)
PR272: C.I. I. Pigment Red 272 (red pigment, diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment)
PY129: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 129 (yellow pigment, azomethine pigment)
PY138: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 138 (yellow pigment, quinophthalone pigment)
PY185: C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 185 (yellow pigment, isoindoline pigment)
a-1: a compound having the following structure
A-1 to A-73: The metal atoms described in the table below have the first ligands described in the table below (the first ligand and the second ligand for structural example (A-4)) Compounds of structural examples (A-1) to (A-73) that are coordinated. Each compound was synthesized by the method described in French Patent Application Publication No. 2013609.
(分散剤)
 D1:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量24000)
 D3:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量17000)
 D4:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量7000)
 D5:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量16000)
 D6:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量10000)
 D7:特許第6432077号公報の段落番号0219に記載のアクリル系ブロック共重合体(EB-1)
 D9:DISPERBYK-142(BYKChemie社製)
 D10:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。重量平均分子量6000)
 D11:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量7500)
(dispersant)
D1: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 24,000)
D3: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 17,000)
D4: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 7000)
D5: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 16,000)
D6: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 10,000)
D7: Acrylic block copolymer (EB-1) described in paragraph number 0219 of Japanese Patent No. 6432077
D9: DISPERBYK-142 (manufactured by BYK Chemie)
D10: Resin having the following structure (numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios; weight average molecular weight: 6000)
D11: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 7,500)
(溶剤)
 S1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 S2:シクロヘキサノン
 S3:酢酸ブチル
 S4:乳酸エチル(EL)
 S5:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 S6:シクロペンタノン
(solvent)
S1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S2: Cyclohexanone S3: Butyl acetate S4: Ethyl lactate (EL)
S5: propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
S6: cyclopentanone
(重合禁止剤)
 H1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
H1: p-methoxyphenol
<着色組成物の製造>
 下記表に記載の素材を混合し、撹拌した後、孔径0.45μmのナイロン製フィルタ(日本ポール(株)製)を用いてろ過して着色組成物を製造した。
<Production of coloring composition>
The materials shown in the table below were mixed, stirred, and then filtered through a nylon filter (manufactured by Nippon Pall Co., Ltd.) having a pore size of 0.45 μm to produce a colored composition.
 上記の略語で示す素材の詳細は下記の通りである。 The details of the materials indicated by the above abbreviations are as follows.
(分散液)
 分散液G1~G102、Y1、R1~R6、g1:上述した分散液G1~G102、Y1、R1~R6、g1
(dispersion liquid)
Dispersions G1-G102, Y1, R1-R6, g1: Dispersions G1-G102, Y1, R1-R6, g1 as described above
(バインダー)
 D1:上述した分散剤D1で説明した樹脂
 D2:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量11000、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。)
 D3:上述した分散剤D3で説明した樹脂
 D8:下記構造の樹脂(重量平均分子量11000、主鎖に付記した数値はモル比である。)
(binder)
D1: Resin described in dispersant D1 described above D2: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 11,000, numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios.)
D3: The resin described in the above dispersant D3 D8: Resin having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 11,000, numerical values attached to the main chain are molar ratios.)
(重合性モノマー)
 M1:下記構造の化合物の混合物(左側化合物(6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と右側化合物(5官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)とのモル比が7:3の混合物)
 M2:下記構造の化合物
 M3:下記構造の化合物
 M4:コハク酸変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(酸価67mgKOH/g)
 M5:下記構造の化合物
 M6:下記構造の化合物
(Polymerizable monomer)
M1: A mixture of compounds having the following structure (a mixture of a left compound (hexafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) and a right compound (pentafunctional (meth)acrylate compound) in a molar ratio of 7:3)
M2: a compound having the following structure
M3: a compound having the following structure
M4: succinic acid-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (acid value 67 mgKOH/g)
M5: a compound having the following structure
M6: a compound having the following structure
(光重合開始剤)
 F1~F6:下記構造の化合物
(Photoinitiator)
F1 to F6: compounds having the following structures
(界面活性剤)
 W1:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量14000、繰り返し単位の割合を示す%の数値はモル%である、フッ素系界面活性剤)
 W2:下記構造の化合物(重量平均分子量3000、シリコーン系界面活性剤)
(Surfactant)
W1: A compound having the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 14,000, percentage of repeating units is mol%, fluorosurfactant)
W2: compound with the following structure (weight average molecular weight: 3000, silicone surfactant)
(重合禁止剤)
 H1:p-メトキシフェノール
(Polymerization inhibitor)
H1: p-methoxyphenol
(紫外線吸収剤)
 UV1:下記構造の化合物
 UV2:下記構造の化合物
(Ultraviolet absorber)
UV1: compound of the following structure UV2: compound of the following structure
(酸化防止剤)
 I1:下記構造の化合物
(Antioxidant)
I1: a compound having the following structure
(エポキシ化合物)
 G1:EHPE3150((株)ダイセル製)
(epoxy compound)
G1: EHPE3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation)
(溶剤)
 S1:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA)
 S2:シクロヘキサノン
 S3:酢酸ブチル
 S4:乳酸エチル(EL)
 S5:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(PGME)
 S6:シクロペンタノン
(solvent)
S1: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA)
S2: Cyclohexanone S3: Butyl acetate S4: Ethyl lactate (EL)
S5: propylene glycol monomethyl ether (PGME)
S6: cyclopentanone
<耐熱拡散性の評価>
 下塗り層付き8インチ(203.2mm)のガラスウェハ上に、各着色組成物をポストベーク後の膜厚が0.5μmの膜厚となるようにスピンコート法で塗布し、次いで、ホットプレートを用いて、100℃で2分間加熱して着色組成物層を得た。
 次いで、この着色組成物層に対して、i線ステッパー露光装置(FPA-3000i5+、キヤノン(株)製)を用い、1000mJ/cmの露光量で5.0μm四方のドットパターンのマスクを介して露光した。次いで、露光後の着色組成物層が形成されているガラスウェハをスピン・シャワー現像機(DW-30型、(株)ケミトロニクス製)の水平回転テーブル上に載置し、現像液(CD-2000(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ(株)製)の60%希釈液)を用いて23℃で60秒間パドル現像を行った。その後、ガラスウェハを真空チャック方式で水平回転テーブルに固定し、回転装置によってガラスウェハを回転数50rpmで回転させつつ、その回転の中心上方より純水を噴出ノズルからシャワー状に供給してリンス処理を行い、スプレー乾燥した。さらに、200℃のホットプレートを用いて300秒間加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行い、画素1を形成した。
 次に、上記画素1が形成されたガラスウェハ上に、耐熱拡散性評価用の着色組成物を用い、ガラスウェハ上の上記画素1の抜け部に、画素1と同様の方法で画素2を形成した。この画素2について、顕微システム(LVmicro V、ラムダビジョン(株)製)を用いて波長400nm~700nmの範囲の透過率(分光1)を測定した。
 その後、画素1および画素2が形成されたガラスウェハを空気雰囲気下のホットプレートを用いて260℃で5分加熱した後、画素2について顕微システム(LVmicro V、ラムダビジョン(株)製)を用いて波長400nm~700nmの範囲の透過率(分光2)を測定した。
 画素2の分光1と分光2とを用いて透過率の変化量の最大値を求め、以下の基準で耐熱拡散性を評価した。透過率の測定は、各試料につき5回行い、最大値と最小値を除いた3回の結果の平均値を採用した。また、透過率の変化量の最大値とは、加熱前後の画素2の、波長400~700nmの範囲における透過率の変化量が最も大きい波長における変化量を意味する。
 なお、耐熱拡散性評価用の着色組成物には、以下に示す青色着色組成物1を用いた。
 -評価基準-
 A:透過率の変化量の最大値が3%未満である。
 B:透過率の変化量の最大値が3%以上4%未満である。
 C:透過率の変化量の最大値が4%以上5%未満である。
 D:透過率の変化量の最大値が5%以上である。
<Evaluation of heat resistant diffusivity>
On an 8-inch (203.2 mm) glass wafer with an undercoat layer, each coloring composition was applied by spin coating so that the film thickness after post-baking was 0.5 μm, and then a hot plate was applied. and heated at 100° C. for 2 minutes to obtain a colored composition layer.
Next, the colored composition layer was exposed to an i-line stepper exposure device (FPA-3000i5+, manufactured by Canon Inc.) at an exposure dose of 1000 mJ/cm 2 through a 5.0 μm square dot pattern mask. exposed. Next, the glass wafer on which the colored composition layer after exposure is formed is placed on a horizontal rotating table of a spin shower developing machine (DW-30 type, manufactured by Chemitronics Co., Ltd.), and a developing solution (CD- 2000 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronic Materials Co., Ltd., 60% diluted solution) was used for puddle development at 23° C. for 60 seconds. After that, the glass wafer was fixed on a horizontal rotating table by a vacuum chuck method, and while rotating the glass wafer at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device, deionized water was supplied in a shower form from an ejection nozzle from above the center of rotation for rinsing. and spray dried. Furthermore, a heat treatment (post-baking) was performed for 300 seconds using a hot plate at 200° C. to form pixels 1 .
Next, on the glass wafer on which the pixels 1 are formed, a coloring composition for heat diffusion resistance evaluation is used, and the pixels 2 are formed in the same manner as the pixels 1 in the missing portions of the pixels 1 on the glass wafer. did. For this pixel 2, the transmittance (spectroscopy 1) in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 700 nm was measured using a microscope system (LVmicro V, manufactured by Lambda Vision Co., Ltd.).
Thereafter, the glass wafer on which pixels 1 and 2 are formed is heated at 260° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate in an air atmosphere, and then pixel 2 is examined using a microscopic system (LVmicro V, manufactured by Lambda Vision Co., Ltd.). was used to measure the transmittance (spectroscopy 2) in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 700 nm.
Using spectroscopy 1 and spectroscopy 2 of pixel 2, the maximum value of the amount of change in transmittance was obtained, and the thermal diffusion resistance was evaluated according to the following criteria. The transmittance measurement was performed 5 times for each sample, and the average value of the results of 3 times excluding the maximum and minimum values was adopted. Further, the maximum value of the amount of change in transmittance means the amount of change at the wavelength in which the amount of change in transmittance of the pixel 2 before and after heating is the largest in the wavelength range of 400 to 700 nm.
In addition, the blue coloring composition 1 shown below was used for the coloring composition for heat-resistant diffusivity evaluation.
-Evaluation criteria-
A: The maximum value of change in transmittance is less than 3%.
B: The maximum value of change in transmittance is 3% or more and less than 4%.
C: The maximum value of change in transmittance is 4% or more and less than 5%.
D: The maximum value of change in transmittance is 5% or more.
(青色着色組成物1)
 C.I.ピグメントブルー15:6の118.5質量部と、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23の29.6質量部と、分散剤D12の51.9質量部と、溶剤S1の800質量部とを混合して混合液を得た。得られた混合液を、循環型分散装置(ビーズミル)として寿工業株式会社製のウルトラアペックスミル(商品名)を用いて分散処理を行い、分散液B1を得た。得られた分散液B1の固形分は20.0質量%であった。
 分散液B1の85.14質量部と、バインダーD8の0.05質量部と、光重合開始剤F3の0.90質量部と、重合禁止剤H1の0.01質量部と、界面活性剤W1の0.01質量部と、溶剤S1の13.89質量部とを混合して青色着色組成物1を調製した。
 なお、溶剤S1、バインダーD、光重合開始剤F3、重合禁止剤H1、界面活性剤W1は、それぞれ上述した素材である。
 分散剤D12:下記構造の樹脂(主鎖に付記した数値はモル比であり、側鎖に付記した数値は繰り返し単位の数である。重量平均分子量20000)
(Blue colored composition 1)
C. I. Pigment Blue 15:6 with 118.5 parts by weight of C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 (29.6 parts by mass), Dispersant D12 (51.9 parts by mass) and Solvent S1 (800 parts by mass) were mixed to obtain a mixture. The resulting mixture was subjected to dispersion treatment using Ultra Apex Mill (trade name) manufactured by Kotobuki Kogyo Co., Ltd. as a circulating dispersing device (bead mill) to obtain Dispersion B1. The solid content of the obtained dispersion B1 was 20.0% by mass.
85.14 parts by mass of dispersion liquid B1, 0.05 parts by mass of binder D8, 0.90 parts by mass of photopolymerization initiator F3, 0.01 parts by mass of polymerization inhibitor H1, and surfactant W1 and 13.89 parts by mass of solvent S1 were mixed to prepare a blue colored composition 1.
The solvent S1, the binder D, the photopolymerization initiator F3, the polymerization inhibitor H1, and the surfactant W1 are the materials described above.
Dispersant D12: Resin having the following structure (the numerical value attached to the main chain is the molar ratio, and the numerical value attached to the side chain is the number of repeating units. Weight average molecular weight: 20,000)
 上記表に示すように実施例はいずれも比較例よりも耐熱拡散性の評価に優れていた。 As shown in the table above, all of the examples were superior to the comparative examples in the evaluation of thermal diffusion resistance.

Claims (11)

  1.  着色剤と、樹脂と、溶剤とを含む着色組成物であって、
     前記着色剤は、金属原子に、式(1)で表される化合物が配位している化合物Aを含む、着色組成物;
     式(1)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
     XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
     Lは、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。
    A coloring composition containing a coloring agent, a resin, and a solvent,
    A coloring composition in which the coloring agent comprises a compound A in which a compound represented by formula (1) is coordinated to a metal atom;
    In formula (1), R 1 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 1 and R 2 may combine to form a ring, and R 3 to R 7 two adjacent groups may be combined to form a ring,
    R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
    X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
    L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  2.  前記化合物Aにおける前記金属原子は、Cu、Zn、Ni、Al、Pd、Co、MnまたはFeである、請求項1に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1, wherein the metal atom in the compound A is Cu, Zn, Ni, Al, Pd, Co, Mn or Fe.
  3.  前記式(1)で表される化合物は、式(2)で表される化合物である、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物;
     式(2)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、R~Rのうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     Rは、水素原子または炭化水素基を表し、RとRは結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     XおよびXは、それぞれ独立して、-OH、-NHRX1または-SHを表し、RX1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
     XとXがそれぞれ独立して-NHRX1である場合には、XとXは結合していてもよく、
     BおよびCはそれぞれ独立して環状構造を表す。
    The compound represented by the formula (1) is a compound represented by the formula (2), the coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2;
    In formula (2), R 3 to R 7 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R 3 to R 7 may combine to form a ring,
    R 8 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group, R 8 and R 7 may combine to form a ring,
    X 1 and X 2 each independently represent -OH, -NHR X1 or -SH, R X1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    when X 1 and X 2 are each independently —NHR X1 , X 1 and X 2 may be bonded;
    B 1 and C 1 each independently represent a cyclic structure.
  4.  前記式(2)のBは、式(B-1)または式(B-2)で表される基を表し、
     前記式(2)のCは、式(C-1)または式(C-2)で表される基を表す、請求項3に記載の着色組成物;
     式(B-1)中、RB11~RB14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB11~RB14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     XB11は、=O、=NHRXB1または=Sを表し、RXB1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
     *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
     式(B-2)中、RB21~RB26は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RB21~RB26のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     XB21は、=O、=NHRXB2または=Sを表し、RXB2は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
     *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
     式(C-1)中、RC11~RC14は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC11~RC14のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である;
     式(C-2)中、RC21~RC24は、それぞれ独立して水素原子または置換基を表し、RC21~RC24のうち隣接する2つの基は結合して環を形成していてもよく、
     XC21は、=O、=NHRXC1または=Sを表し、RXC1は、水素原子または置換基を表し、
     *1および*2はそれぞれ結合手を表し、*1はXとの結合手である。
    B 1 in formula (2) represents a group represented by formula (B-1) or formula (B-2),
    C 1 of formula (2) represents a group represented by formula (C-1) or formula (C-2), the coloring composition according to claim 3;
    In formula (B-1), R B11 to R B14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B11 to R B14 may combine to form a ring. often,
    X B11 represents =O, =NHR XB1 or =S, R XB1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    *1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 ;
    In formula (B-2), R B21 to R B26 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R B21 to R B26 may combine to form a ring. often,
    X B21 represents =O, =NHR XB2 or =S, R XB2 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    *1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X1 ;
    In formula (C-1), R C11 to R C14 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C11 to R C14 may combine to form a ring. often,
    *1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 ;
    In formula (C-2), R C21 to R C24 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a substituent, and two adjacent groups among R C21 to R C24 may combine to form a ring. often,
    X C21 represents =O, =NHR XC1 or =S, R XC1 represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent,
    *1 and *2 each represent a bond, and *1 is a bond with X2 .
  5.  前記着色剤は、緑色着色剤および赤色着色剤からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種を含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the coloring agent contains at least one selected from the group consisting of a green coloring agent and a red coloring agent.
  6.  更に、重合性化合物と、光重合開始剤とを含む、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising a polymerizable compound and a photopolymerization initiator.
  7.  カラーフィルタ用である、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, which is for a color filter.
  8.  請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物から得られる膜。 A film obtained from the colored composition according to claim 1 or 2.
  9.  請求項8に記載の膜を有する光学フィルタ。 An optical filter having the film according to claim 8.
  10.  請求項8に記載の膜を有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the film according to claim 8.
  11.  請求項8に記載の膜を有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the film according to claim 8.
PCT/JP2023/004269 2022-02-16 2023-02-09 Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device WO2023157740A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022-021743 2022-02-16
JP2022021743 2022-02-16

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023157740A1 true WO2023157740A1 (en) 2023-08-24

Family

ID=87578173

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2023/004269 WO2023157740A1 (en) 2022-02-16 2023-02-09 Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW202337923A (en)
WO (1) WO2023157740A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012068559A (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2020510732A (en) * 2017-09-04 2020-04-09 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Colorant compound and coloring composition containing the same
JP2020086424A (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-06-04 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2021099394A (en) * 2019-12-20 2021-07-01 Jsr株式会社 Colored composition, cured colored film, and color filter, display element, light receiving element and light emitting element

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2012068559A (en) * 2010-09-27 2012-04-05 Toyo Ink Sc Holdings Co Ltd Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2020510732A (en) * 2017-09-04 2020-04-09 エルジー・ケム・リミテッド Colorant compound and coloring composition containing the same
JP2020086424A (en) * 2018-11-19 2020-06-04 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Coloring composition for color filter and color filter
JP2021099394A (en) * 2019-12-20 2021-07-01 Jsr株式会社 Colored composition, cured colored film, and color filter, display element, light receiving element and light emitting element

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW202337923A (en) 2023-10-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7170732B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7425093B2 (en) Colored resin compositions, films, color filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices
WO2022202204A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP2024012409A (en) Colored photosensitive composition, cured product, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and asymmetric diketopyrrolopyrrole compound
WO2023243414A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
WO2023085072A1 (en) Colored curable composition, method for producing cured product, film, optical element, image sensor, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and radical polymerization initiator
JPWO2020022248A1 (en) Curable composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device
WO2022168743A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2022168741A1 (en) Colored composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2022168742A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound
JPWO2020004114A1 (en) Photosensitive composition, film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device
WO2023157740A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JP7290731B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP7302014B2 (en) Coloring composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device
JP7371121B2 (en) Colored compositions, films, optical filters, solid-state imaging devices, and image display devices
WO2023157741A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2023149273A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element and image display device
WO2023145699A1 (en) Infrared absorbing composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, and camera module
JP7389900B2 (en) Magenta photosensitive resin composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2023145700A1 (en) Infrared absorbing composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, infrared sensor, and camera module
JP7301989B2 (en) Coloring composition, cured film, color filter and display device
JP7271662B2 (en) Resin composition, film, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
WO2023120387A1 (en) Resin composition, film, optical filter, solid imaging element, and image display device
WO2023162790A1 (en) Colored composition, film, color filter, solid imaging element, image display device, and compound
WO2023037828A1 (en) Coloring composition, film, optical filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and compound

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23756266

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1